- Version
- Download 1449
- Tamanho do Arquivo 5.12 MB
- File Count 1
- Data de Criação 3 de julho de 2020
- Ultima Atualização 3 de julho de 2020
○○○○○○ Series User’s Manual
XGB Hardware (IEC)
Programmable Logic Controller
XGT Series
XEC-DR32H
XEC-DN32H
XEC-DP32H
XEC-DR64H
XEC-DN64H
XEC-DP64H
XEC-DR32H/D1
XEC-DR64H/D1
Safety Instruction
Before using the product …
For your safety and effective operation, please read the safety instructions
thoroughly before using the product.
► Safety Instructions should always be observed in order to prevent accident
or risk with the safe and proper use the product.
► Instructions are separated into “Warning” and “Caution”, and the meaning of
the terms is as follows;
This symbol indicates the possibility of serious injury
or death if some applicable instruction is violated
This symbol indicates the possibility of slight injury
| or damage to products if some applicable instruction is violated |
Caution |
► The marks displayed on the product and in the user’s manual have the
following meanings.
Be careful! Danger may be expected.
Be careful! Electric shock may occur.
► The user’s manual even after read shall be kept available and accessible to
any user of the product.
Warning
Safety Instruction
Safety Instructions when designing
Please, install protection circuit on the exterior of PLC to protect
the whole control system from any error in external power or PLC
module. Any abnormal output or operation may cause serious problem
in safety of the whole system.
- Install applicable protection unit on the exterior of PLC to protect
the system from physical damage such as emergent stop switch,
protection circuit, the upper/lowest limit switch, forward/reverse
operation interlock circuit, etc.
- If any system error (watch-dog timer error, module installation error,
etc.) is detected during CPU operation in PLC, the whole output is
designed to be turned off and stopped for system safety. However,
in case CPU error if caused on output device itself such as relay or
TR can not be detected, the output may be kept on, which may
cause serious problems. Thus, you are recommended to install an
addition circuit to monitor the output status.
Never connect the overload than rated to the output module nor
allow the output circuit to have a short circuit, which may cause a
fire.
Never let the external power of the output circuit be designed to
be On earlier than PLC power, which may cause abnormal output or
operation.
In case of data exchange between computer or other external
equipment and PLC through communication or any operation of
PLC (e.g. operation mode change), please install interlock in the
sequence program to protect the system from any error. If not, it
may cause abnormal output or operation.
Warning
Safety Instruction
Safety Instructions when designing
Safety Instructions when designing
I/O signal or communication line shall be wired at least 100mm
away from a high-voltage cable or power line. If not, it may cause
abnormal output or operation.
Caution
Use PLC only in the environment specified in PLC manual or
general standard of data sheet. If not, electric shock, fire, abnormal
operation of the product or flames may be caused.
Before installing the module, be sure PLC power is off. If not,
electric shock or damage on the product may be caused.
Be sure that each module of PLC is correctly secured. If the
product is installed loosely or incorrectly, abnormal operation, error or
dropping may be caused.
Be sure that I/O or extension connecter is correctly secured. If
not, electric shock, fire or abnormal operation may be caused.
If lots of vibration is expected in the installation environment,
don’t let PLC directly vibrated. Electric shock, fire or abnormal
operation may be caused.
Don’t let any metallic foreign materials inside the product, which
may cause electric shock, fire or abnormal operation..
Caution
Safety Instruction
Safety Instructions when wiring
Prior to wiring, be sure that power of PLC and external power is
turned off. If not, electric shock or damage on the product may be
caused.
Before PLC system is powered on, be sure that all the covers of
the terminal are securely closed. If not, electric shock may be caused
Warning
Let the wiring installed correctly after checking the voltage rated
of each product and the arrangement of terminals. If not, fire,
electric shock or abnormal operation may be caused.
Secure the screws of terminals tightly with specified torque when
wiring. If the screws of terminals get loose, short circuit, fire or abnormal
operation may be caused.
*
Surely use the ground wire of Class 3 for FG terminals, which is
exclusively used for PLC. If the terminals not grounded correctly,
abnormal operation may be caused.
Don’t let any foreign materials such as wiring waste inside the
module while wiring, which may cause fire, damage on the product
or abnormal operation.
Caution
Safety Instruction
Safety Instructions for test-operation or repair
Safety Instructions for waste disposal
Don’t touch the terminal when powered. Electric shock or abnormal
operation may occur.
Prior to cleaning or tightening the terminal screws, let all the
external power off including PLC power. If not, electric shock or
abnormal operation may occur.
Don’t let the battery recharged, disassembled, heated, short or
soldered. Heat, explosion or ignition may cause injuries or fire.
Warning
Don’t remove PCB from the module case nor remodel the module.
Fire, electric shock or abnormal operation may occur.
Prior to installing or disassembling the module, let all the external
power off including PLC power. If not, electric shock or abnormal
operation may occur.
Keep any wireless installations or cell phone at least 30cm away
from PLC. If not, abnormal operation may be caused.
Caution
Product or battery waste shall be processed as industrial waste.
The waste may discharge toxic materials or explode itself.
Caution
Revision History
| Version | Date | Remark | Chapter |
| V 1.0 | 2009.2 | 1. First Edition | - |
| V 1.1 | 2009.6 | 1. Add detailed description on High Speed Counter specification |
Ch8.1.1 |
| V 1.2 | 2009.10 | 1. Add DC power unit | Ch2.1, Ch2.2 Ch4.1, Ch4.3 Ch7.2.1, Ch7.2.2 Ch8.1.1, Ch8.1.2 Appendix2 |
| V1.5 | 2010.10 | 1. Add new module 2. Error in consumption current calculation fixed 3. Error in Momentary power failure and watch dog fixed 4. Error in program execution fixed 5. Error in memory unit fixed 6. Error in remote function fixed 7. RTC flag, setting method modified 8. Input speciation of main unit fixed 9. Contents related with XGI deleted 10. Voltage reference fixed 11. Contents related with STOP LED deleted 12. APM_SSSB modified 13. XEC-DP32H/DP64H added |
Ch2.1, Ch2.2, Ch2.3.1, Ch4.1 Ch4.3, Ch4.4 Ch5.1.2, Ch5.1.4 Ch5.2.2 Ch5.4.1 Ch6.4 Ch6.12 Ch7.2.1, Ch7.2.2 Ch10.2 Ch10.3 Ch.11 Appendix4 Ch4.1, Ch4.3 Ch7.3.4, Ch7.3.6 Appendix2 |
| V1.6 | 2014.2 | 1. Domain Of Homepage Changed 2. Add XEC-DN32H/DC |
Front/Back Cover Ch2.1, Ch2.2 Ch4.1, Ch4.3 Ch7.2.1, Ch7.3.3 Ch8.1.1 Appendix2 |
| V1.7 | 2015.7 | 1. Address & phone number changed 2. Add new module 3. Vibration Specification modified |
Back Cover Ch2.1, Ch2.2, Ch2.3.3, Ch2.3.4 Ch3.1 |
The number of User’s manual is indicated the right side of the back cover.
ⓒ LSIS Co. ,Ltd. 2009 All Rights Reserved.
About User’s Manual
About User’s Manual
Thank you for purchasing PLC of LSIS Co.,Ltd.
Before use, make sure to carefully read and understand the User’s Manual about the functions,
performances, installation and programming of the product you purchased in order for correct use and
importantly, let the end user and maintenance administrator to be provided with the User’s Manual.
The Use’s Manual describes the product. If necessary, you may refer to the following description and order
accordingly. In addition, you may connect our website(http://eng.lsis.biz/) and download the information as a
PDF file.
Relevant User’s Manual
| Title | Description | No. of User Manual |
| XG5000 User’s Manual (XGI/XGR/XEC) |
It describes how to use XG5000 software especially about online functions such as programming, printing, monitoring and debugging by using XGB (IEC language) |
10310000512 |
| XGI/XGR/XEC Series Instruction & Programming |
It describes how to use the instructions for programming using XGB (IEC language) series. |
10310000510 |
| XGB Hardware User’s Manual (IEC language) |
It describes how to use the specification of power/input /output/expansion modules, system configuration and built-in High-speed counter for XGB main unit. |
10310000983 |
| XGB Analog User’s Manual |
It describes how to use the specification of analog input/analog output/temperature input module, system configuration and built-in PID control for XGB main unit. |
10310000920 |
| XGB Position User’s Manual |
It describes how to use built-in positioning function for XGB main unit. |
10310000927 |
| XGB Cnet I/F User’s Manual |
It describes how to use built-in communication function for XGB main unit and external Cnet I/F module. |
10310000816 |
| XGB Fast Ethernet I/F User’s Manual |
It describes how to use XGB FEnet I/F module. | 10310000873 |
| ◎ Contents ◎ |
| Chapter 1 Introduction ...................................................................... 1-1~1-5 |
1.1 Guide to Use This Manual...................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Features ................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Terminology ........................................................................................................... 1-4
| Chapter 2 System Configuration........................................................... 2-1~2-11 |
2.1 XGB System Configuration .................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Product List .......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Classification and Type of Product Name ............................................................. 2-4
2.3.1 Classification and type of main unit ..........................................................................2-4
2.3.2 Classification and type of expansion module ...........................................................2-5
2.3.3 Classification and type of special module .................................................................2-6
2.3.4 Classification and type of communication module .....................................................2-7
2.3.5 Classification and Type of Option Module ................................................................2-7
2.4 System Configuration ........................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.1 Cnet I/F system ..........................................................................................................2-8
2.4.2 Ethernet system........................................................................................................2-11
| Chapter 3 General Specifications ................................................................. 3-1 |
3.1 General Specifications ........................................................................................... 3-1
| Chapter 4 CPU Specifications ................................................................. 4-1~4-9 |
4.1 Performance Specifications .................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Names of Part and Function ................................................................................. 4-3
4.3 Power Supply Specifications ................................................................................ 4-4
4.4 Calculation Example of Consumption Current/Voltage ........................................... 4-6
4.5 Battery ................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.5.1 Battery specification ...................................................................................................4-8
4.5.2 Notice in using ............................................................................................................4-8
4.5.3 Life of battery..............................................................................................................4-8
4.5.4 How to change the battery .........................................................................................4-9
| Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method.................. 5-1~5-28 |
5.1 Program Instruction .............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Program execution methods ....................................................................................5-1
5.1.2 Operation processing during momentary power failure ...........................................5-2
5.1.3 Scan time ..................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.4 Scan Watchdog timer ...............................................................................................5-4
5.2 Program Execution ............................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 Configuration of program ..........................................................................................5-5
5.2.2 Program execution methods ......................................................................................5-5
5.2.3 Interrupt . ....................................................................................................................5-7
5.3 Operation Mode ................................................................................................. 5-19
5.3.1 RUN mode ..............................................................................................................5-19
5.3.2 STOP mode ............................................................................................................5-20
5.3.3 DEBUG mode .........................................................................................................5-20
5.3.4 Change operation mode .........................................................................................5-24
5.4 Memory................................................................................................................ 5-25
5.4.1 Program memory ....................................................................................................5-25
5.4.2 Data memory ............................................................................................................5-26
5.4.3 Data retain area setting ..........................................................................................5-26
5.4.4 Data Memory Map ....................................................................................................5-28
| Chapter 6 CPU Functions ...................................................................... 6-1~6-24 |
6.1 Type Setting ......................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Parameter Setting ................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Basic parameter setting ............................................................................................6-2
6.2.2 I/O parameter setting ................................................................................................6-3
6.3 Self-diagnosis Function ........................................................................................ 6-4
6.3.1 Saving of error log ....................................................................................................6-4
6.3.2 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................6-4
6.4 Remote Functions.................................................................................................. 6-6
6.5 Forced Input/Output On and Off Function .............................................................. 6-7
6.5.1 Force I/O setup .........................................................................................................6-7
6.5.2 Processing time and method of Forced Input/Output On and Off ............................6-8
6.6 Direct Input/Output Operation ................................................................................6-9
6.7 Diagnosis of External Device ...............................................................................6-10
6.8 Allocation of Input/Output Number ....................................................................... 6-11
6.9 Online Editing ......................................................................................................6-13
6.10 Reading Input/Output Information ...................................................................... 6-16
6.11 Monitoring ........................................................................................................ 6-17
6.12 RTC function...................................................................................................... 6-22
6.12.1 How to use ............................................................................................................6-22
| Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications ............................................... 7-1~7-31 |
7.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Digital Input Specifications of Main Unit ................................................................ 7-7
7.2.1 XEC-DR32H / XEC-DN32H input unit (Source/Sink type).........................................7-7
7.2.2 XEC-DR64H / XEC-DN64H input unit (Source/Sink Type)........................................7-8
7.3 Digital Output Specification of Main Unit ............................................................... 7-9
7.3.1 XEC-DR32H output unit.............................................................................................7-9
7.3.2 XEC-DR64H output unit ...........................................................................................7-10
7.3.3 XEC-DN32H output unit (Sink type).........................................................................7-11
7.3.4 XEC-DP32H output unit (Source type) ....................................................................7-12
7.3.5 XEC-DN64H output unit (Sink type).........................................................................7-13
7.3.6 XEC-DP64H output unit (Source type) ....................................................................7-14
7.4 Digital Input Module Specification ....................................................................... 7-15
7.4.1 8 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type) ....................................................7-15
7.4.2 16 point DC24V input module (Sink/Source type) ..................................................7-16
7.4.3 32 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type) ...................................................7-17
7.5 Digital Output Module Specifications .................................................................. 7-18
7.5.1 8 point relay output module......................................................................................7-18
7.5.2 16 point relay output module....................................................................................7-19
7.5.3 8 point transistor output module (Sink type) ............................................................7-20
7.5.4 16 point transistor output module (Sink type) ..........................................................7-21
7.5.5 32 point transistor output module (Sink type) ..........................................................7-22
7.5.6 8 point transistor output module (Source type) ........................................................7-23
7.5.7 16 point transistor output module (Source type) ......................................................7-24
7.5.8 32 point transistor output module (Source type) ......................................................7-25
7.6 Combined Module Digital Input Specification ....................................................... 7-26
7.6.1 8 point DC24V input part (Source/Sink type) ...........................................................7-26
7.7 Combined Module Digital Output Specification..................................................... 7-27
7.7.1 8 point relay output part ...........................................................................................7-27
7.8 IO Wiring by Using Smart Link Board................................................................... 7-28
7.8.1 Smart link board .....................................................................................................7-28
| Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function .............................. 8-1~8-32 |
8.1 High-speed Counter Specifications ........................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Performance specifications ......................................................................................8-1
8.1.2 Designation of parts ..................................................................................................8-2
8.1.3 Counter Function........................................................................................................8-4
8.2 Installation and Wiring ........................................................................................ 8-21
8.2.1 Precaution for wiring ...............................................................................................8-21
8.2.2 Example of wiring ...................................................................................................8-21
8.3 Internal Memory ................................................................................................. 8-22
8.3.1 Special area for High-speed counter ......................................................................8-22
8.3.2 Error code ...............................................................................................................8-27
8.4 Examples: Using High-speed Counter ................................................................ 8-28
| Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring ........................................................ 9-1~9-18 |
9.1 Safety Instruction ................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 Fail safe circuit ..........................................................................................................9-3
9.1.2 PLC heat calculation ..................................................................................................9-6
9.2 Attachment/Detachment of Modules ..................................................................... 9-8
9.2.1 Attachment/Detachment of modules .......................................................................9-8
9.2.2 Caution in handling ..................................................................................................9-13
9.3 Wire ..................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.3.1 Power wiring.............................................................................................................9-14
9.3.2 I/O Device wiring ......................................................................................................9-17
9.3.3 Grounding wiring ......................................................................................................9-17
9.3.4 Specifications of wiring cable ...................................................................................9-18
| Chapter 10 Maintenance .................................................................... 10-1~10-2 |
10.1 Maintenance and Inspection ............................................................................. 10-1
10.2 Daily Inspection ................................................................................................ 10-1
10.3 Periodic Inspection ........................................................................................... 10-2
| Chapter 11 Troubleshooting ............................................................ 11-1~11-12 |
11.1 Basic Procedure of Troubleshooting ................................................................. 11-1
11.2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................. 11-1
11.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the PWR(Power) LED turns Off. ........11-2
11.2.2 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the ERR(Error) LED is flickering .......11-3
11.2.3 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the RUN,STOP LED turns Off. .........11-4
11.2.4 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the I/O part doesn’t operate normally..11-5
11.3 Troubleshooting Questionnaire ......................................................................... 11-7
11.4 Troubleshooting Examples ............................................................................... 11-8
11.4.1 Input circuit troubles and corrective actions .........................................................11-8
11.4.2 Output circuit and corrective actions ......................................................................11-9
11.5 Error Code List..................................................................................................11-11
| Appendix 1 Flag List ............................................................. App. 1-1~App.1-8 |
Appendix 1.1 Special Relay (F) List .....................................................................App. 1-1
Appendix 1.2 Communication Relay (L) List ........................................................App. 1-5
Appendix 1.3 Network Register (N) List ..............................................................App. 1-8
| Appendix 2 Dimension............................................................. App.2-1~App.2-4 |
| Appendix 3 Compatibility with GLOFA................................... App.3-1~App.3-7 |
| Appendix 4 Instruction List ................................................... App.4-1~App.4-13 |
Appendix 4.1 Basic Function.................................................................................App.4-1
Appendix 4.2 MK(MASTER-K) Function .............................................................App.4-10
Appendix 4.3 Array Operation Function .............................................................App.4-10
Appendix 4.4 Basic Function Block................................................................... App.4-11
Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 Introduction
| 1.1 Guide to Use This Manual |
This manual includes specifications, functions and handling instructions for the XGB series PLC.
This manual is divided up into chapters as follows.
| No. | Title | Contents |
| Chapter 1 | Introduction | Describes configuration of this manual, unit’s features and terminology. |
| Chapter 2 | System Configurations | Describes available units and system configuration in the XGB series. |
| Chapter 3 | General Specifications | Describes general specifications of units used in the XGB series. |
| Chapter 4 | CPU Specifications | Describes performances, specifications and operations. |
| Chapter 5 | Program Configuration and Operation Method |
|
| Chapter 6 | CPU Module Functions | |
| Chapter 7 | Input/Output Specifications | Describes operation of basic and input/output. |
| Chapter 8 | Built-in High-speed Counter Function |
Describes built-in high-speed counter functions. |
| Chapter 9 | Installation and Wiring | Describes installation, wiring and handling instructions for reliability of the PLC system. |
| Chapter 10 | Maintenance | Describes the check items and method for long operation of the PLC system. -term normal |
| Chapter 11 | Troubleshooting | Describes various operation errors and corrective actions. |
| Appendix 1 | Flag List | Describes the types and contents of various flags. |
| Appendix 2 | Dimension | Shows dimensions of the main units and expansion modules. |
| Appendix 3 | Compatibility with GLOFA |
Describes the compatibility with GLOFA. |
| Appendix 4 | Instruction List | Describes the special relay and instruction list. |
1-1
Chapter 1 Introduction
| 1.2 Features |
The features of XGB system are as follows.
(1) The system secures the following high performances.
(a) High Processing Speed
(b) Max. 384 I/O control supporting small & mid-sized system implementation
| Item | Specification | Reference |
| Operation processing speed |
83ns / Step | - |
| Max IO contact point | 384 points | |
| Program capacity | 200KB | - |
| Max. no. of expanded base |
10 stages | - |
(c) Enough program capacity
(d) Expanded applications with the support of floating point.
(2) Compact : the smallest size comparing to the same class model of competitors.
(a) Compact panel realized through the smallest size.
| Item | Type | Size (W * H * D) | Reference |
| Main unit | XEC-Dx32H | 114 * 90 * 64 | |
| XEC-Dx64H | 180 * 90 * 64 | ||
| Extension module | XBE-,XBF-,XBL- | 20 * 90 * 60 | Basis of minimum size |
(3) Easy attachable/extensible system for improved user convenience.
(a) Easy attachable to European terminal board and convenient-to-use MIL connector method improving
convenient wiring. (“S” type main unit and expanded module)
(b) By adopting a removable terminal block connector (M3 X 6 screw), convenience of wiring may be
increased.
(c) By adopting connector coupling method, modules may be easily connected and separated.
(4) Improved maintenance ability with kinds of register, built-in RTC (“H” type), comment backup and etc
(a) Convenient programming environment by providing analogue register, array and structure.
(b) Improved maintenance ability by operating plural programs and task program through module program.
(c) Built-in Flash ROM enabling permanent backup of program without any separate battery.
(d) Improved maintenance ability by types of comment backup.
(e) Built-in RTC function enabling convenient history and schedule management
1-2
Chapter 1 Introduction
(5) Optimized communication environment.
(a) With max. 2 channels of built-in COM (excl. loader), up to 2 channel communication is available without
any expanded of module.
(b) Supporting various protocols to improve the convenience (leaseddedicated, Modbus, user-defined
communication)
(c) Communication module may be additionally increased by adding modules (up to 2 rackstages such as
Cnet, Enet and etc).
(d) Convenient network-diagnostic function through network & communication frame monitoring.
(e) Convenient networking to upper systems through Enet or Cnet.
(f) High speed program upload and download by USB Port
(6) Applications expanded with a variety of I/O modules.
(a) 8, 16, 32 points modules provided (if relay output, 8/16 points module).
(b) Single input, single output and combined I/O modules supported.
(7) Applications expanded through analogue-exclusive dedicated register design and full attachable
mechanism.
(a) All analogue modules can be attachable on extension base. (H type: up to 10 racks stages available)
(b) With analogue exclusive dedicated register(U) and monitoring exclusive dedicated function, convenient
use for I/O is maximized (can designate operations using easy programming of U area and monitoring
function)
(8) Integrated programming environment
(a) XG 5000: intensified program convenience, diverse monitoring, diagnosis and editing function
(b) XG - PD: COM/network parameters setting, frame monitoring, protocol analysis function
(9) Built-in high speed counter function
(a) Providing high High-speed counter 1phase, 2phase and more additional functions.
(b) Providing parameter setting, diverse monitoring and diagnosis function using XG5000.
(c) Monitoring function in XG5000 can inspect without program, inspecting external wiring, data setting and
others.
(마침표)
(10) Built-in position control function
(a) Supporting max 100Kpps 2 axes.
(b) Providing parameter setting, operation data collection, diverse monitoring and diagnosis by using
XG5000.
(c) Commissioning by monitoring of XG5000, without program, inspecting external wiring and operation data
setting.
1-3
Chapter 1 Introduction
(11) Built-in PID
(a) Supporting max. 16 loops.
(b) Setting parameters by using XG5000 and supporting loop status monitoring conveniently with trend
monitor.
(c) Control constant setting through the improved automatic Auto-tuning function.
(d) With many other additional functions including PWM output, ∆MV, ∆PV and SV Ramp, improving the
control preciseness.
(e) Supporting types of control modes such as forward/backward mixed operation, 2-stage SV PID control,
cascade control and etc.
(f) A variety of warning functions such as PV MAX and PV variation warning securing the safety.
| 1.3 Terminology |
The following table gives definition of terms used in this manual.
| Terms | Definition | Remark |
| Module | A standard element that has a specified function which configures the system. Devices such as I/O board, which inserted onto the mother board. |
Example) Expansion module, Special module, Communication module |
| Unit | A single module or group of modules that perform an independent operation as a part of PLC systems. |
Example) Main unit, Expansion unit |
| PLC System | A system which consists of the PLC and peripheral devices. A user program can control the system. |
- |
| XG5000 | A program and debugging tool for the MASTER-K series. It executes program creation, edit, compile and debugging. (PADT: Programming Added Debugging Tool) |
- |
| XG - PD | Software to execute description, edition of basic parameter, high speed link, P2P parameter, and function of communication diagnosis |
- |
| I/O image area | Internal memory area of the CPU module which used to hold I/O status. |
|
| Cnet | Computer Network | - |
| FEnet | Fast Ethernet Network | - |
| Pnet | Profibus-DP Network | - |
| Dnet | DeviceNet Network | - |
| RTC | Abbreviation of ‘Real Time Clock’. It is used to call general IC that contains clock function. |
- |
| Watchdog Timer | Supervisors the pre-set execution times of programs and warns if a program is not competed within the pre-set time. |
- |
1-4
Chapter 1 Introduction
| Terms | Definition | Remark |
| Sink Input | Current flows from the switch to the PLC input terminal if a input signal turns on. |
Z: Input impedance |
| Source Input | Current flows from the PLC input terminal to the switch after a input signal turns on. |
- |
| Sink Output | Current flows from the load to the output terminal and the PLC output turn on. |
- |
| Source Output | Current flows from the output terminal to the load and the PLC output turn on. |
- |
| - |
| Output Contact |
1-5
Chapter 2 System Configuration
Chapter 2 System Configuration
The XGB series has suitable to configuration of the basic, computer link and network systems.
This chapter describes the configuration and features of each system.
| 2.1 XGB System Configuration |
XGB series System Configuration is as follows. Expanded I/O module and special module are available to
connect maximum 7 stages for “S” type and 10 stages for “H” type. Expanded communication module is
available to connect maximum 2 stages.
| Item | Description | |
| Total I/O points | • XEC-DxxxH : 32~384 points | |
| Maximum number of expansion modules |
Digital I/O module | • Max. 10 |
| Special module | • Max. 10 | |
| Comm. I/F module | • Maximum 2 | |
| Items | Main unit | • refer to 2.2 Product List |
| Expansion module |
Digital I/O module | |
| Special module | ||
| Communication I/F module |
||
| Option module |
Memory module |
* XG5000 V3.0 or above is required for XEC
Main Unit I/O Module Special Module Communication Module
2-1
Chapter 2 System Configuration
| 2.2 Product List |
XGB series’ product list is as follows.
| Types | Model | Description | Remark |
| Main Unit | XEC-DR32H | AC 100V~220V power, DC24V input 16 points, relay output 16 points | - |
| XEC-DN32H | AC 100V~220V power, DC24V input 16 points, TR output 16 points | - | |
| XEC-DN32H/DC | DC 24V power, DC24V input 16 points, TR output 16 points | ||
| XEC-DR64H | AC 100V~220V power, DC24V input 32 points, relay output 32 points | - | |
| XEC-DN64H | AC 100V~220V power, DC24V input 32 points, TR output 32 points | - | |
| XEC-DR32H/D1 | DC 12/24V power, DC12V input 16 points, relay output 16 points | ||
| XEC-DR64H/D1 | DC 12/24V power, DC12V input 32 points, relay output 32 points | ||
| Digital I/O module | XBE-DC08A | DC24V Input 8 point | - |
| XBE-DC16A | DC24V Input 16 point | - | |
| XBE-DC32A | DC24V Input 32 point | - | |
| XBE-RY08A | Relay output 8 point | - | |
| XBE-RY08B | Relay output 8 point (independent point) | ||
| XBE-RY16A | Relay output 16 point | - | |
| XBE-TN08A | Transistor output 8 point | - | |
| XBE-TN16A | Transistor output 16 point | - | |
| XBE-TN32A | Transistor output 32 point | - | |
| XBE-TN64A | Transistor output 64 point (sink type) | - | |
| XBE-TP16A | Transistor output 16 point (source type) | - | |
| XBE-TP32A | Transistor output 32 point (source type) | - | |
| XBE-DR16A | DC24V Input 8 point, Relay output 8 point | - | |
| Special Module | XBF-AD04A | Current/Voltage input 4 channel | Analog ln/Out |
| XBF-AD04C | Current/Voltage input 4 channel, High resolution | ||
| XBF-AD08A | Current/Voltage input 8 channel | ||
| XBF-DC04A | Current output 4 channel | ||
| XBF-DC04C | Current output 4 channel, High resolution | ||
| XBF-DV04A | Voltage output 4 channel | ||
| XBF-DV04C | Voltage output 4 channel, High resolution | ||
| XBF-AH04A | Current/Voltage input 2 channel, Current/Voltage output 2 channel, | ||
| XBF-RD04A | RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) input 4 channel | Temperat ure |
|
| XBF-RD01A | RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) input 1 channel | ||
| XBF-TC04S | TC (Thermocouple) input 4 channel | ||
| XBF-PD02A | Position 2Axis, Line Drive type | Position | |
| XBF-HD02A | High Speed Counter 2 channel, Line Drive Type | Counter | |
| XBF-HO02A | High Speed Counter 2 channel, Open Collector Type | ||
| XBF-TC04RT | Temperature controller module (RTD input, 4 roof) | Temperat ure |
|
| XBF-TC04TT | Temperature controller module (TC input, 4 roof) |
2-2
Chapter 2 System Configuration
| Types | Model | Description | Remark |
| Communication Module |
XBL-C21A | Cnet (RS-232C/Modem) I/F | - |
| XBL-C41A | Cnet (RS-422/485) I/F | - | |
| XBL-EMTA | Enet I/F | - | |
| XBL-EIMT | RAPIEnet I/F 2 UTP cable | - | |
| XBL-EIPT | EtherNet I/P Module | ||
| XBL-CMEA | CANopen MasterI/F | - | |
| XBL-CSEA | CANopen Slave I/F | - | |
| XBL-PMEC | Pnet I/F | - | |
| Option module |
XBO-M1024A | Memory module | - |
| Download Cable |
PMC-310S | Connection cable (PC to PLC), 9pin(PC)-6pin(PLC) | - |
| USB-301A | Connection cable (PC to PLC), USB | - |
| Download Cable (PMC-310S) Diagram |
| Note |
2-3
Chapter 2 System Configuration
| 2.3 Classification and Type of Product Name |
2.3.1 Classification and type of main unit
Name of main unit is classified as follows.
| Classification | Name | DC input | Relay output | Transistor output | Power |
| Module type Main unit |
XBM-DR16S | 8 point | 8 point | None | DC24V |
| XBM-DN16S | 8 point | None | 8 point | ||
| XBM-DN32S | 16 point | None | 16 point | ||
| Compact type Main unit (MK language) |
XBC-DR32H | 16 point | 16 point | None | AC110V~220V |
| XBC-DN32H | 16 point | None | 16 point | ||
| XBC-DR64H | 32 point | 32 point | None | ||
| XBC-DN64H | 32 point | None | 32 point | ||
| XBC-DR32H/DC | 16 point | 16 point | None | DC24V | |
| XBC-DN32H/DC | 16 point | None | 16 point | ||
| XBC-DR64H/DC | 32 point | 32 point | None | ||
| XBC-DN64H/DC | 32 point | None | 32 point | ||
| Compact type main unit (IEC language) |
XEC-DR32H | 16 point | 16 point | None | AC110V~220V |
| XEC-DN32H | 16 point | None | 16 point | ||
| XEC-DR64H | 32 point | 32 point | None | ||
| XEC-DN64H | 32 point | None | 32 point | ||
| XEC-DP32H | 16 point | None | 16 point | ||
| XEC-DP64H | 32 point | None | 32 point | ||
| XEC-DR32H/D1 | 16 point | 16 point | None | DC 12/24V | |
| XEC-DR64H/D1 | 32 point | 32 point | None |
| X | B | M |
-
| D | R | X X | S |
Relay output (R)
Sink type transistor output (N)
Source type transistor output (P)
No. of IO point
XGB PLC standard (S)
XGB PLC XGB PLC High-end type (H)
Module type main unit (M)
Compact type main unit(C)
DC input
MK language supported (B)
IEC language supported (E)
2-4
Chapter 2 System Configuration
2.3.2 Classification and type of expansion module
Name of expansion module is classified as follows.
| Name | DC input | Relay output | Transistor output | Reference |
| XBE-DC08A | 8 point | None | None | |
| XBE-RY08A/B | None | 8 point | None | |
| XBE-TN08A | None | None | 8 point (Sink type) | |
| XBE-TP08A | None | None | 8 point (Source type) | |
| XBE-DC16A/B | 16 point | None | None | |
| XBE-RY16A | None | 16 point | None | |
| XBE-TN16A | None | None | 16 point (Sink type) | |
| XBE-TP16A | None | None | 16 point (Source type) | |
| XBE-DR16A | 8 point | 8 point | None | |
| XBE-DC32A | 32 point | None | None | |
| XBE-TN32A | None | None | 32 point (Sink type) | |
| XBE-TP32A | None | None | 32 point (Source type) |
| X | B | E |
-
| DC |
X X A
Relay output(RY)
Transistor output (TN/TP)
Digital input (DC)
Digital input+ sink type transistor output (DN)
Digital input+ source type transistor output (DP)
Digital input + relay output (DR)
XGB series No. of IO point
I/O expansion module
2-5
Chapter 2 System Configuration
2.3.3 Classification and type of special module
Special module is classified as follows.
| Classification | Name | No. of input ch. |
Input type | output ch. No. of | Output type |
| Analog input | XBF-AD04A | 4 | Voltage/Current | None | - |
| XBF-AD08A | 8 | Voltage/Current | None | ||
| Analog output | XBF-DC04A | None | - | 4 | Current |
| XBF-DC04B | None | - | 4 | Current | |
| XBF-DV04A | None | - | 4 | Voltage | |
| XBF-AH04A | 2 | Voltage/Current | 2 | Voltage/Current | |
| RTD input | XBF-RD04A | 4 | PT100/JPT100 | None | - |
| XBF-RD01A | 1 | PT100/JPT100 | None | - | |
| TC input | XBF-TC04S | 4 | K, J, T, R | None | - |
| XBF-TC04RT | 4 | PT100/JPT100 | 4 | Transister | |
| XBF-TC04TT | 4 | K, J, T, R | 4 | Transister | |
| Positioning module |
XBF-PD02A | - | Line Driver | 2 | Voltage |
| High Speed Counter |
XBF-HD02A | 2 | Line Driver | ||
| XBF-HO02A | 2 | Open Collector |
| X | B | F |
-
| AD |
X X A
Analog input (AD)
Analog voltage output (DC)
Analog current output (DV)
Analog combined module (AH)
RTD input (RD)
Thermocouple input (TC)
Line driver positioning module (PD)
No. of IO point
XGB series
Expansion special module
Non-insulation type (A)
Insulation type (S)
2-6
Chapter 2 System Configuration
2.3.4 Classification and type of communication module
Name of communication module is classified as follows.
| Classification | Name | Type |
| Cnet Comm. Module | XBL-C21A | RS-232C, 1 channel |
| XBL-C41A | RS-422/485, 1 channel | |
| FEnet Comm. Module | XBL-EMTA | Electricity, open type Ethernet |
| RAPIEnet Comm. Module | XBL EIMT/EIMF/EIMH |
Comm. Module between PLCs, electric media, 100 Mbps industrial Ethernet supported |
| EtherNet Comm. Module | XBL-EIPT | Open EtherNet I/P |
| CANopen Comm. Module | XBL-CMEA | CANopen Master |
| XBL-CSEA | CANopen Slave | |
| Pnet Comm. Module | XBL-PMEC | Profibus-DP |
2.3.5 Classification and Type of Option Module
Name of option module is classified as follows.
| Classification | Name | Type |
| Memory module | XBO-M1024A | Memory module : 1,024 KB |
| X | B | L | - | C21A |
Cnet 1 channel (RS-232C): C21A
Cnet 1 channel (RS-422/485): C41A
FEnet 1 channel: EMTA
RAPIEnet 1 channel: EIMT
XGB series
Expansion communication module
| X | B | O | - | M1024A |
Memory module : 1,024 KB
XGB series
Option module
2-7
Chapter 2 System Configuration
| 2.4 System Configuration |
2.4.1 Cnet I/F system
Cnet I/F System is used for communication between the main unit and external devices using RS-
232C/RS-422 (485) Interface. The XGB series has a built-in RS-232C port, RS-485 port and has also
XBL-C21A for RS-232C, XBL-C41A for RS-422/485. It is possible to construct communication systems
on demand.
(1) 1:1 communication system
(a) 1:1 communication of an external device (computer) with main unit using a built-in port
(RS-232C/RS-485)
(b) 1:1 communication with main unit using a built-in RS-485 port
(In case of built-in RS-232C,it is for connecting to HMI device.)
| Built- |
in RS-232C Connection
PADT
connection
Built-in RS-485 Connection
| RS-232C / RS-485 |
XEC-DR32H
XEC-DR32H XEC-DR32H
XP30-TTA
2-8
Chapter 2 System Configuration
(c) 1:1 RS-232C Communication with remote device via modem by Cnet I/F modules
(d) 1:1 communication of an external device (monitoring unit) with main unit using a built-in RS-
232C/485 port.
Modem
Modem
XEC-DR32H XBL-C21A XEC-DR32H XBL-C21A
Modem
Modem
XEC-DR32H XBL-C21A
Built-in RS-232C/485 connection
XP30-TTA
XEC-DR32H
2-9
Chapter 2 System Configuration
(2) 1:n Communication system
(a) Using RS-485 built-in function can connect between one computer and multiple main units for up
to 32 stations.
(b) Using RS-485 built-in function/expansion Cnet I/F module can be connect for up to 32 stations.
| 1) Refer to ‘XGB Cnet I/F user manual’ for details |
| Note |
| x. 32 stations available | |
| XEC-DN32H | XEC-DN32H |
PADT connection
Built-in RS-232C connection
Max. 32 stations available
PADT connection
Built-in RS-232C connection
XEC-DN32H XBL-C41A XEC-DN32H XBL-C41A
Max. 32 stations available
Max. 32 stations available
2-10
Chapter 2 System Configuration
Hub Hub
Hub
Hub
Router or
Gateway
Router or
Gateway
Public line
2.4.2 Ethernet system
Ethernet made by cooperation of Xerox, Intel, DEC is standard LAN connection method (IEEE802.3),
which is network connection system using 1.5KB packet with 100Mbps transmission ability. Since
Ethernet can combine a variety of computer by network, it is called as standard specification of LAN and
diverse products. By adopting CSMA/CD method, it is easy to configure the network and collect large
capacity data.
| 1) Refer to | ‘XGB FEnet I/F user manual’ for details |
| Note |
100Base-TX
M
HMI
HMI
H
2-11
Chapter 3 General Specifications
Chapter 3 General Specifications
3.1 General Specifications
The General specification of XGB series is as below.
| No. | Items | Specifications | Related standards | |
| 1 | Ambient temperature |
0 ~ 55 °C | - | |
| 2 | Storage temperature |
-25 ~ +70 °C | ||
| 3 | Ambient humidity |
5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing) | ||
| 4 | Storage humidity |
5 ~ 95%RH (Non-condensing) | ||
| 5 | Vibration resistance |
Occasional vibration | - | |
| Frequency | Acceleration | Amplitude | times | IEC61131-2 |
| 5 ≤ f < 8.4Hz | - | 3.5mm | 10 times each directions (X, Y and Z) |
|
| 8.4 ≤ f ≤ 150Hz | 9.8m/s2(1G) | - | ||
| Continuous vibration | ||||
| Frequency | Acceleration | Pulse width | ||
| 5 ≤ f < 8.4Hz | - | 1.75mm | ||
| 8.4 ≤ f ≤ 150Hz | 4.9m/s2(0.5G) | - | ||
| 6 | Shock resistance |
• Peak acceleration: 147 m/s2(15G) • Duration: 11ms • Half-sine, 3 times each direction per each axis |
||
| 7 | Noise resistance |
Square wave Impulse noise |
AC: ±1,500 V DC: ±900 V |
LSIS standard |
| Electrostatic discharge |
4kV (Contact discharge) | IEC61000 IEC61131-4-2-2 | ||
| Radiated electromagnetic field noise |
80 ~ 1,000 MHz, 10V/m | IEC61131-2, IEC61000-4-3 |
||
| Fast transient/bust noise |
Segment | Power supply module |
Digital/analog input/output communication interface |
IEC61131-2 IEC61000-4-4 |
| Voltage | 2kV | 1kV | ||
| 8 | Environment | Free from corrosive gasses and excessive dust | ||
| 9 | Altitude | Up to 2,000 ms | ||
| 10 | Pollution degree |
2 or less | ||
| 11 | Cooling | Air-cooling |
| 1) IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) : An international civil community that promotes international cooperation for standardization of electric/ electro technology, publishes international standard and operates suitability assessment system related to the above. 2) Pollution Degree : An index to indicate the pollution degree of used environment that determines the insulation performance of the device. For example, pollution degree 2 means the state to occur the pollution of non-electric conductivity generally, but the state to occur temporary electric conduction according to the formation of dew. |
| Notes |
3-1
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
| 4.1 Performance Specifications |
The following table shows the general specifications of the XGB main module type
| Items | Specifications | Remark | ||||
| XEC- DR32H(/D1) |
XEC DR64H(/D1) |
XEC DN32H(/DC) |
XEC DN64H |
XEC DP32H |
XEC DP64H |
|
| Numb er of instruc tions |
Operator | 18 | ||||
| Basic function | 136 + Real number operation function | |||||
| Basic function block | 43 | |||||
| Dedicated function block |
Special function dedicated function | |||||
| Processing speed | Basic instruction : 0.083 ㎲/step | |||||
| Program memory capacity | 200KB (XEC 200KB corresponds to XGI 110KB) | |||||
| Max. I/O points | 352 | 384 | 352 | 384 | 352 | 384 |
| Data memory |
Automatic variable (A) |
32KB (Max. 16KB retain setting available) | ||||
| Input variable (I) | 2 KB (%IX15.15.63) | |||||
| Output variable (Q) | 2 KB (%QX15.15.63) | |||||
| Direct variable |
M | 16KB (Max. 8KB retain setting available) | ||||
| R | 20KB (1block) | |||||
| W | 20KB | Same area with R | ||||
| Flag variable |
F | 2KB | System flag | |||
| K | 8KB | Built-in special flag | ||||
| L | 4KB | High speed link flag | ||||
| N | 10KB | P2P flag | ||||
| U | 1KB | Analog flag | ||||
| Flash area | 20KB, 2 block | R device used | ||||
| Timer | No limit to the number of point (time range: 0.001s ~ 4,294,967,295s) | 20 byte automatic variable area occupied per r point |
||||
| Counter | No limit to the number of point (count range: 64 bit expression range) | |||||
| Operation mode | RUN, STOP, DEBUG | |||||
| Restart mode | Cold, Warm | |||||
| Total number of program block |
128 | |||||
| Task | Initialization | 1 | ||||
| Fixed period | 8 | |||||
| External input | 8 (%IX0.0.0 ~ %IX0.0.7) | |||||
| Internal device | 8 | |||||
| Self diagnosis | Detecting operation delay, memory error, I/O error | |||||
| Data reserved in case of power cut |
Setting retain area at basic parameter | |||||
| Number of max. extension stage |
10 stage | |||||
| Internal consumption current |
660mA | 1,040mA | 260mA | 330mA | 300mA | 380mA |
| Weight | 600g | 900g | 500g | 800g | 500g | 800g |
4-1
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
| Items | Specifications | Remark | |
| Built-in function | PID control function | Controlled by instructions, Auto-tuning, PWM output, Manual output, Adjustable operation scan time, Anti Windup, Delta MV function, SV Ramp function |
- |
| Cnet I/F function | Dedicated protocol support MODBUS protocol support RS-232C 1 port User defined protocol support RS-485 1 port |
||
| High-speed counter | Capacity | AC type |
1 phase: 100 kHz 4 channel, 20kHz 4 channel 2 phase: 50 kHz 2 channel, 10kHz 2 channel |
| D1 type |
1 phase : 100 kHz 4 channel, 10 kHz 4 channel 2 phase : 50 kHz 2 channel, 5 kHz 2 channel |
||
| Counter mode |
4 different counter modes according to input pulse and addition/subtraction method • 1 phase pulse input: addition/subtraction counter • 1 phase pulse input: addition/subtraction counter by B phase • 2 phase pulse input: addition/subtraction counter • 2 phase pulse input: addition/subtraction by phase differences |
||
| Additional function |
• Internal/External preset function • Latch counter function • Comparison output function • Revolution number per unit time function |
||
| Positioning function | Basic function | No. of control axis: 2 axes Control method: position/speed control Control unit: pulse Positioning data: 80 data/axis (operation step No. 1~80) Operation mode: End/Keep/Continuous Operation method: Single, Repeated operation |
TR output type support |
| Positioning function |
Positioning method: Absolute / Incremental Address range: -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 Speed: Max. 100Kpps(setting range 1 ~ 100,000pps) Acceleration / Deceleration method : trapezoidal method |
||
| Return to Origin | Origin detection when approximate origin turns off Origin detection when approximate origin turns on Origin detection by approximate origin. |
||
| JOG operation | Setting range: 1~100,000 ( High / Low speed) | ||
| Additional function |
Inching operation, Speed synchronizing operation, Position synchronizing operation, linear interpolation operation etc. |
||
| Pulse catch | 10 ㎲ 4 points (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.3), 50 ㎲ 4points (%IX0.0.4 ~ %IX0.0.7) |
- | |
| External interrupt | 10 ㎲ 4points (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.3), 50 ㎲ 4 points (%IX0.0.4 ~ %IX0.0.7) |
||
| Input filter | Select among 1,3,5,10,20,70,100 ㎳ (Adjustable) |
4-2
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
| 4.2 Names of Part and Function |
| XGB Compact type main unit (IEC language) | |||
| No. | Name | Description | |
| ① | Input indicator LED | ▪ Input indicator LED | |
| ② | PADT connecting connector |
▪ PADT connecting USB (USB 1.1 supported) 1 channel, RS-232C 1 channel connector |
|
| ③ | Input connector and terminal block |
▪ Input connector and terminal block | |
| ④ | Output connector and terminal block |
▪ Output connector and terminal block | |
| ⑤ | Key switch | ▪ RUN / STOP Key switch In case of STOP mode, Remote mode changeable. |
|
| ⑥ | Output indicator LED | ▪ Output indicator LED | |
| ⑦ | Status indicator LED | It indicates CPU module’s status. ▪ PWR(Red): Power status ▪ RUN(Green): RUN status STOP mode: Off/ RUN mode : On ▪ Error(Red): In case of error, it is flickering. |
|
| ⑧ | 8-1 | Built-in RS-232C / RS-485 Connecting connector |
Built-in RS-485 connecting connector “+” , “-“ terminal connecting connector in RS-485 communication ▪ Built-in RS-232C connecting connector “TxD” , “RxD“ , “GND” connecting connector in RS-232C |
| 8-2 | Power supply connector |
▪ AC100~240V power supply connector | |
| ⑨ | Battery holder | ▪ Battery (3V) holder | |
| ⑩ | Mode switch | ▪ Program mode and O/S download mode select switch |
| ① ② ④ ⑤ ⑥ ③ ⑦ 8-1 8-2 ⑩ ⑨ |
4-3
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
| 4.3 Power Supply Specifications |
Describes power specification of main unit
| Items | Specification | ||||||
| XEC-DR32H XEC-DN32H XEC-DP32H |
XEC-DR64H XEC-DN64H XEC-DP64H |
XEC DN32H/DC |
XEC DR32H/D1 |
XEC DR64H/D1 |
|||
| Input | Rated voltage (UL warranty voltage) |
AC 100 ~ 240 V | DC24V | DC 12/24V | |||
| Input voltage range | AC85~264V(-15%, +10%) | DC19.2~28.8V (-20%,+20%) | DC 9.5~30V | ||||
| Inrush current | 50APeak or less | 50APeak or less |
50APeak or less | ||||
| Input current | AC 220V : 0.5A or less, AC 110V : 1A or less |
0.7A or less | DC 12V : 1.4 A or less DC 24V : 0.7 A or less |
DC 12V : 2.1 A or less DC 24V : 1.0 A or less |
|||
| Efficiency | 65% or more | 60% or more | |||||
| Permitted momentary power failure |
Less than 10 ㎳ | DC 12V : less than 2 ㎳ DC 24V : less than 10 ㎳ |
|||||
| Output | Rated output |
DC5V | 2A | 3A | 2A | 2A | 3A |
| DC24V | 0.4A | 0.6A | - | - | - | ||
| Output voltage ripple | DC5V (±2%) | DC4.9~5.15V | |||||
| Power supply status indication | LED On when power supply is normal | ||||||
| Cable specification | 0.75 ~ 2 mm2 |
* Use the power supply which has 4 A or more fuse for protecting power supply.
4-4
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
(1) Consumption current (DC 5V)
| Type | Model | Consumption current (Unit : ㎃) |
| Main unit | XEC-DR32H | 660 |
| XEC-DR64H | 1,040 | |
| XEC-DN32H | 260 | |
| XEC-DN64H | 330 | |
| XEC-DP32H | 300 | |
| XEC-DP64H | 380 | |
| XEC-DR32H/D1 | 660 | |
| XEC-DR64H/D1 | 1,040 | |
| Expansion I/O module | XBE-DC32A | 50 |
| XBE-DC16A/B | 40 | |
| XBE-DC08A | 30 | |
| XBE-RY16A | 440 | |
| XBE-RY08A/B | 240 | |
| XBE-TN32A | 80 | |
| XBE-TN16A | 60 | |
| XBE-TN08A | 50 | |
| XBE-TP32A | 80 | |
| XBE-TP16A | 60 | |
| XBE-TP08A | 50 | |
| XBE-DR16A | 250 | |
| Expansion special module | XBF-AD04A | 120 |
| XBF-DV04A | 110 | |
| XBF-DC04A | 110 | |
| XBF-DC04B | 110 | |
| XBF-RD04A | 100 | |
| XBF-RD01A | 100 | |
| XBF-TC04S | 100 | |
| XBF-PD02A | 500 | |
| XBF-AH04A | 120 | |
| XBF-AD08A | 105 | |
| Expansion communication module | XBL-C21A | 120 |
| XBL-C41A | 120 | |
| XBL-EMTA | 300 | |
| XBL-EIMT | 290 | |
| XBL-EIPT | 290 | |
| Memory module | XBO-M1024A | 40 |
4-5
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
| 4.4 Calculation Example of Consumption Current/Voltage |
Calculate the consumption current and configure the system not to exceed the output current capacity of
main unit.
(1) XGB PLC configuration example 1
Consumption of current/voltage is calculated as follows.
| Type | Model | Unit No. | Internal 5V consumption current (Unit : ㎃) |
Remark |
| Main unit | XEC-DN32H | 1 | 260 | In case contact points are On. (Maximum consumption current) |
| Expansion module |
XBE-DC32A | 2 | 50 | |
| XBE-TN32A | 2 | 80 | ||
| XBF-AD04A | 1 | 120 | All channel is used. (Maximum consumption current) |
|
| XBF-DC04A | 1 | 110 | ||
| XBL-C21A | 1 | 120 | ||
| Consumption current |
870 ㎃ | - | ||
| Consumption voltage |
4.35 W | 0.87A ⅹ 5V = 4.35W |
In case system is configured as above, since 5V consumption current is total 870 mA and 5V output of XGB
32 points main unit is maximum 2A, normal system configuration is available.
(2) XGB PLC configuration example 2
| Type | Model | Unit No. | Internal 5V consumption current (Unit : ㎃) |
Remark |
| Main unit | XEC-DR32H | 1 | 660 | In case all contact points are On. (Maximum consumption current) |
| Expansion module |
XBE-DR16A | 5 | 250 | |
| XBE-TN32A | 2 | 80 | ||
| XBF-AD04A | 1 | 120 | All channel is used. (Maximum consumption current) |
|
| XBL-C21A | 1 | 120 | ||
| Consumption current |
2,310mA | - | ||
| Consumption voltage |
11.55W | 2.31 * 5V = 11.55W |
If system is configured as above, total 5V current consumption is exceeded 2,310mA and it exceeds the 5V
output of XGB 32 points main unit. Normal system configuration is not available. Although we assume the
above example that all contact points are on, please use 64 points main unit which 5V output capacity is
higher than standard type main unit.
4-6
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
(3) XGB PLC configuration example 3
| Type | Model | Unit No. | Internal 5V consumption current (Unit : ㎃) |
Remark |
| Main unit | XEC-DR64H | 1 | 1,040 | In case of all contact points are On. (Maximum consumption current) |
| Expansion module |
XBE-DR16A | 5 | 250 | |
| XBE-TN32A | 2 | 80 | ||
| XBF-AD04A | 1 | 120 | All channel is used. (Maximum consumption current) |
|
| XBL-C21A | 1 | 120 | ||
| Consumption current |
2,690mA | - | ||
| Consumption voltage |
13.45W | 2.69A ⅹ 5V = 13.45W |
The above system is an example using XEC-DR64H, 64 points main unit, about system (2). Unlike (2)
example, 5V output capacity of XEC-DR64H is maximum 3A, normal configuration is available.
| Remark |
| Calculating of consumption current is based on maximum consumption current. In application system, the consumption current is consumed less than above calculation. |
4-7
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
4.5 Battery
Battery is inserted in XGB PLC compact main unit (XEC-DR32/64H, XEC-DN32/64H, XEC-DP32/64H)
4.5.1 Battery specification
| Item | Specification |
| Voltage/Current | DC 3V / 220 mAh |
| Warranty period | 3 years (ambient temp.) |
| Purpose | Program and data backup, RTC operation in case of power failure |
| Specification | Manganese Dioxide lithium battery |
| Dimension (mm) | φ 20 X 3.2 mm |
4.5.2 Notice in using
(1) Do not heat the battery or solder the polarity. ( It may cause the reduction of life.)
(2) Do not measure the voltage or short with tester. (It may cause the fire.)
(3) Do not disassemble the battery.
4.5.3 Life of battery
Life of battery depends on the power failure time and ambient temperature etc..
If battery is getting low, main unit cause the warning, ‘battery voltage low warning’. The user can check it
by error LED, flag and error message of XG5000.
Since battery works properly for long time, after battery voltage low warning, so the user can take the
action after battery voltage low warning occurred.
4-8
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications
4.5.4 How to change the battery
The user should change the battery used to save the program and backup the data in case of power
failure periodically. Though the user eliminate the battery, it works for 30 minute by super capacitor.
Change the battery as fast as possible.
Sequence changing battery is as follows.
| Start of battery change |
| Open battery cover Insert new battery and connect to connector with proper direction ERR LED off? No |
| Battery malfunction |
Pick up using battery from holder and
disassemble the connector
Check the LED whether ERR LED is off
Yes
Complete
4-9
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
| 5.1 Program Instruction |
5.1.1 Program execution methods
(1) Cyclic operation method (Scan)
This is a basic program proceeding method of PLC that performs the operation repeatedly for the prepared
program from the beginning to the last step, which is called ‘program scan’. The series of processing like
this is called ‘cyclic operation method’. The processing is divided per stage as below.
| Stage | Processing description |
| - | |
| A stage to start the scan processing which is executed once when power is applied or Reset is executed, as below. Self-diagnosis execution Data clear Address allocation of I/O module and type register If initializing task is designated, Initializing program is executed. |
|
| Reads the state of input module and saves it in input image area before starting the operation of program. |
|
| Performs the operation in order from the program start to last step. |
|
| Performs the operation in order from the program start to last step. | |
| A processing stage to return to the first step after CPU module completes 1 scan processing and the processing performed is as below. Update the current value of timer and counter etc. User event, data trace service Self-diagnosis High speed link, P2P e-Service Check the state of key switch for mode setting |
| Start | |
| Initialization | processing |
| Input image | area refresh |
| Program operatio Progra Progra |
|
| n processing start last step |
|
| Output image | area refresh |
| END |
5-1
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(2) Interrupt operation (Cycle time, Internal device)
This is the method that stops the program operation in proceeding temporarily and carries out the
operation processing which corresponds to interrupt program immediately in case that there occurs the
status to process emergently during PLC program execution.
The signal to inform this kind of urgent status to CPU module is called ‘interrupt signal’. There is a Cycle
time signal that operates program every appointed time and external interrupt signal that operates program
by external contact point (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7). Besides, there is an internal device start program that
starts according to the state change of device assigned inside.
(3) Constant Scan (Fixed Period)
This is the operation method that performs the scan program every appointed time. This stands by for a
while after performing all the scan program, and starts again the program scan when it reaches to the
appointed time. The difference from constant program is the update of input/output and the thing to
perform with synchronization.
At constant operation, the scan time indicates the net program processing time where the standby time is
deducted. In case that scan time is bigger than ‘constant’, %FX92 (_CONSTANT_ER) flag shall be ‘ON’.
5.1.2 Operation processing during momentary power failure
CPU module detects the momentary power failure when input power voltage supplied to power module is lower
than the standard. If CPU module detects the momentary power failure , it carries out the operation processing
as follows.
If momentary power failure within 10 ms is occurred, main unit (CPU) keeps the operation. But, if
momentary power failure above 10 ㎳, the operation is stop and the output is Off. Restart processing
like at power input shall be performed.
(1) Momentary power failure within 10 ms
(2) Momentary power failure exceeding 10 ms
| Remark |
| 1) Momentary power failure? This means the state that the voltage of supply power at power condition designated by PLC is lowered as it exceeds the allowable variable range and the short time (some ms ~ some dozens ms) interruption is called ‘momentary power failure’ ). |
Restart processing like at power input shall
be performed.
Input power
Input power
Momentary power failure exceeding 10 ms
Momentary power failure within 10 ms
(1) When momentary power failure occurs, PLC holds
its output status and stop operation.
(2) If momentary power failure is canceled, operation
continues.
(3) Output voltage of power module keeps value is
specification.
(4) Though momentary power failure occurs and
operation stops, timer measurement and timer
measurement for interrupt is conducted normally.
5-2
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
5.1.3 Scan time
The processing time from program step 0 to the next step 0 is called ‘Scan Time’.
(1) Scan time calculation expression
Scan time is the sum of the processing time of scan program and interrupt program prepared by the user
and PLC internal time, and is distinguished by the following formula.
(a) Scan time = Scan program processing time ＋ Interrupt program processing time ＋ PLC internal
processing time
Scan program processing time = processing time of user program not saved as interrupt program
Interrupt program processing time = Sum of interrupt program proceeding time processed during 1 scan
PLC internal processing time = Self-diagnosis time ＋ I/O refresh time ＋ Internal data processing time
＋ Communication service processing time
(b) Scan time depends on whether to execute interrupt program and communication processing.
(2) Scan time monitor
(a) Scan time can be monitored 『Online』 -『PLC Information』 -『Performance』 .
(b) Scan time is save in special relay (F) area as follows.
%FW50: max. value of scan time (unit: 0.1 ms)
%FW51: min. value of scan time (unit: 0.1 ms)
%FW52: current value of scan time (unit: 0.1 ms)
5-3
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
5.1.4 Scan Watchdog timer
WDT (Watchdog Timer) is the function to detect the program congestion by the error of hardware and software of
PLC CPU module.
(1) WDT is the timer used to detect the operation delay by user program error. The detection time of WDT is
set in Basic parameter of XG5000.
(2) If WDT detects the excess of detection setting time while watching the elapsed time of scan
during operation, it stops the operation of PLC immediately and keeps or clears the output according
to parameter setting
(3) If the excess of Scan Watchdog Time is expected in the program processing of specific part while
performing the user program (FOR ~ NEXT instruction, CALL instruction), clear the timer by using
‘WDT_RST’ Function
‘WDT_RST’ Function initializes the elapsed time of Scan Watchdog Timer and starts the time measurement
from 0 again.
(For further information of WDT_RST Function, please refer to Instruction.)
(4) To clear the error state of watchdog, we can use the following method : power re-supply, PLC reset,
mode conversion to STOP mode.
| Remark |
| 1) The setting range of Watchdog Timer is 10 ~ 1000ms (Unit: 1ms). |
WDT_RST instruction
execution
| 0 1 2 3 ….. …8 9 | 0 1 2 … 0 1 2 … …6 7 |
0 1 2 … |
WDT Reset SCAN END
WDT
count(ms) SCAN END
5-4
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
| 5.2 Program Execution |
5.2.1 Configuration of program
All functional elements need to execute a certain control process are called as a ‘program’. Program is stored in
the built-in RAM mounted on a CPU module or flash memory of a external memory module. The following table
shows the classification of the program.
| Program type | Description |
| Initializing program | • It will be executed till the specific Flag ‘INIT_DONE’ is On. And while the initialization task is executed, several of initializing program is programmed. (If INIT_DONE instruction is executed, scan program is executed.) |
| Scan program | • The scan program is executed regularly in every scan. |
| Cycle time interrupt program |
• The program is performed according to the fixed time interval in case that the required processing time condition is as below. In case that the faster processing than 1 scan average processing time is required In case that the longer time interval than 1 scan average processing time is required In case that program is processed with the appointed time interval |
| External interrupt program |
• The external interrupt program is performed process on external interrupt signal. |
| Subroutine program |
• Only when some condition is satisfied.(in case that input condition of CALL instruction is On) |
5.2.2 Program execution methods
Here describes the program proceeding method that is executed when the power is applied or key switch is ‘RUN’.
The program performs the operation processing according to the configuration as below.
Start processing
Scan program
END processing
| Subroutine program ernal interrupt program |
| Ext |
| Cycle time program |
Only when some
condition is satisfied.
| Initializing program |
It executes up to execution of INIT_DONE instruction when initializing program is designated.
5-5
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(1) Scan program
(a) Function
• This program performs the operation repeatedly from 0 step to last step in order prepared by the program
to process the signal that is repeatedly regularly every scan.
• In case that the execution condition of interrupt by task interrupt or external input while executing program
is established, stop the current program in execution and perform the related interrupt program.
(2) Interrupt program
(a) Function
• This program stops the operation of scan program and then processes the related function in prior to
process the internal/external signal occurred periodically/non-periodically.
(b) Type
• Task program is divided as below.
- Cycle time task program: available to use up to 8.
- Internal device task program: available to use up to 8.
- I/O (External contact task program): available to use up to 8. (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7)
• Cycle time task program
- Performs the program according to the fixed time internal.
• Internal device task program
- Performs the corresponding program when the start condition of internal device occurs.
- The start condition detection of device shall be performed after processing of scan program.
• I/O (External contact task program)
- Performs the program according to the input external signal (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7).
| Remark |
| (1) Write the interrupt program as shortly as possible. In case same interrupt occurs repeatedly before completion of interrupt, program is not executed and O/S watch dog error may occur. (2) Though interrupt which has lower priority occurs many times during execution of interrupt which has higher priority, interrupt which has lower priority occurs only one time. |
5-6
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
5.2.3 Interrupt
For your understanding of Interrupt function, here describes program setting method of XG5000 which is an XGB
programming S/W. Example of interrupt setting is as shown bellows.
• Interrupt setting
| Interrupt source | Interrupt name | priority | Task No. | Program |
| Initializing | Interrupt 0_ | - | - | - |
| Cycle time 1 | Interrupt 1_cycle time | 2 | 0 | Cycle time 1 |
| External | Interrupt 2_external | 2 | 8 | External |
| Internal device | Interrupt 3_internal | 3 | 16 | Internal |
| Cycle time 2 | Interrupt 4_cycle time | 3 | 1 | Cycle time 2 |
| Remark |
| • In case that several tasks to be executed are waiting, execute from the highest Task Program in priority. When the same priority tasks are waiting, execute from the order occurred. • While interrupt executing, if the highest interrupt is occurred, the highest interrupt is executed earliest of all. • When power On, All interrupts are in the state ‘Enable’. • Internal device interrupt is executed after END instruction. |
Initializing
(Before INIT_DONE instruction)
Interrupt 1_Cycle time Cycle time 1 execution
occur
Cycle time 1/
external occur
simultaneously
Cycle time 1 execution
External I/O execution
Internal device
Interrupt occur
| Internal device interrupt execution |
| Cycle time 1 execution |
Timed-driven 1
execution
Cycle time 2
occur
Cycle time 2 execution
END
Scan program
5-7
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(1) How to prepare interrupt program
Generate the task in the project window of XG5000 as below and add the program to be performed by each
task. For further information, please refer to XG5000 user’s manual.
(It can be additional when XG5000 is not connected with PLC.)
(a) Click right button of mouse on project name and click 『Add item』 -『Task』 .
(b) The screen of Task setting is shown. Click 『Initialization』 in Execution condition and make a Task name.
5-8
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(c) Click right button of mouse at registered task and select『Add Item』 -『Program』 .
(d) Make initializing program. In initializing program, INIT_DONE instruction must be made. If not, Scan
program is not executed.
5-9
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(2) How to prepare Cycle interrupt program
Generate the task in the project window of XG5000 as below and add the program to be performed by each
task. For further information, please refer to XG5000 user’s manual.
(It can be additional when XG5000 is not connected with PLC)
(a) Click right button of mouse at registered task and select『Add Item』 -『Task』 .
• It shows setting screen of Task.
5-10
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(b) Task type
| Classification | Description | Remark | |
| Task name | Make Task name. | Character, number available |
|
| Priority | Set the priority of task. (2~7) | “2” is the highest priority number. |
|
| Task number | Set the Task number. • Cycle time task (0 ~ 7): 8 • External I/O task (8 ~ 15): 8 • Internal device task (16 ~ 23): 8 |
- | |
| Execution condition |
Initialization | Set the initial program when running the project. | Till the execution of INIT_DONE instruction |
| Cycle time | Set the cyclic interrupt. | 0~4294967295 ㎳ available |
|
| I/O | Set the external I/O. | %IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7 available |
|
| Internal device |
Set the internal device to interrupt execution. • Bit: Among Rising, Falling, Transition, On, Off • Word: Among >,>=,<,<= |
- |
(c) Click right button of mouse at registered task and select『Add Item』 -『Program』 .
5-11
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(d) Register the Program name and Program description.
(e) It is displayed the program window to write task program.
(f) It is displayed the setting in project window.
5-12
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(3) Task type
Task type and function is as follows.
| Type Spec. |
Cycle time task (Interval task) |
I/O task (Interrupt task) |
Internal device task (Single task) |
| Max. Task number |
8 | 8 | 8 |
| Start condition | Cyclic (setting up to max. 4,294,967.295 sec. by 1ms unit) |
Rising or falling edge of main unit’s contact (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7) |
Internal device execution condition |
| Detection and execution |
Cyclic execution per setting time |
Immediate execution at the edge of main unit’s contact (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7) |
Retrieve the condition and execute after completing Scan Program |
| Detection delay time |
Max. 1 ms delay | Max. 0.05 ms delay | Delay as much as max. scan time |
| Execution priority |
2~7 level setting (2 level is highest in priority) |
2~7 level setting (2 level is highest in priority) |
2~7 level setting (2 level is highest in priority) |
| Task no. | Within 0~7 range without user duplication |
With 8~15 range without user duplication |
Within 16~23 range without user duplication |
(4) Processing methods of task program
Here describes common processing method and notices for Task program.
(a) Feature of task program
1) Task Program is executed only when execution condition occurs without every scan repeat processing.
When preparing Task Program, please consider this point.
2) For example, if a timer and counter were used in cyclic task program of 10 second cycle, this timer
occurs the tolerance of max. 10 seconds and the counter and the timer and as the counter checks the
input status of counter per 10 seconds, the input changed within 10 seconds is not counted up.
(b) Execution priority
1) In case that several tasks to be executed are waiting, execute from the highest Task Program in priority.
When the same priority tasks are waiting, execute from the order occurred.
2) In case Cycle time task and external I/O task is occurred concurrently, execute from the highest task
program. (In sequence of XG5000 setting)
3) The task program priority should be set considering the program features, importance and the
emergency when the execution requested.
(c) Processing delay time
There are some causes for Task Program processing delay as below. Please consider this when task
setting or program preparation.
1) Task detection delay (Refer to detailed description of each task.)
2) Program proceeding delay caused by Priority Task Program proceeding
(d) Relationship of initialize, Scan Program and Task Program
1) ser identification task does not start while performing Initialization Task Program.
2) As Scan Program is set as lowest priority, if task occurs, stop Scan Program and process Task Program
in advance. Accordingly, if task occurs frequently during 1 scan or concentrates intermittently, scan time
may extend abnormally. Cares should be taken in case of task condition setting.
5-13
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(e) Protection of Program in execution from Task Program
1) In case that the continuity of program execution is interrupted by high priority Task Program during
program execution, it is available to prohibit the execution of Task Program partially for the part in
problem. In this case, it is available to perform the program protection by ‘ DI (Task Program Start
Disabled) and ‘EI (Task Program Start Enabled)’ Function
2) Insert ‘DI’ Function in the start position of the part requiring the protection and insert ‘EI’ Function in the
position to release. Initialization Task is not influenced by ‘DI’, ‘EI’ Function.
3) If interrupt is occurred while ‘CALLP’ instruction executing, interrupt program is executed after ‘CALLP’
instruction execution.
(5) Cyclic task program processing method
Here describes the processing method in case that task (start condition) of Task program is set as Cycle
time.
(a) Items to be set in Task
Set the execution cycle and priority which are the start condition o f Task program to execution. Check the
task no. to manage the task.
(b) Cyclic task processing
Performance the corresponding cyclic task program per setting time interval (execution cycle).
(c) Notice in using cyclic task program
1) When cyclic task program is in execution currently or waiting for execution, if the demand to execute the
same task program occurs, the new occurred task shall be disregarded.
2) Timer that makes a demand to execute cyclic task program only while operation mode is Run mode,
shall be added. The shutdown time shall be all disregarded.
5-14
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
3) When setting the execution cycle of cyclic task program, consider the possibility that the demand to
execute several cyclic task program at the same time occurs.
If 4 cyclic task programs that the cycle is 2sec, 4sec, 10sec and 20sec are used, 4 demands of
execution per 20 seconds shall be occurred at the same time and scan time may extend
instantaneously.
(6) I/O task program processing
It described the I/O task program processing. (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7)
5-15
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(a) Items to be set in Task
Set the execution condition and priority to the task being executed. Check the task no. to manage the
task.
(b) I/O task processing
If interrupt signal from external signal (I/O) is occurred on main unit (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7), task program is
executed by external (I/O) signal.
(c) Precaution in using I/O task program
1) If task program which is executed by interrupt signal is on execution or standby status, new task
program which is requested by identical I/O is ignored.
2) Only operation mode is Run mode, execution request of task program is recognized. Namely, execution
request of task program is ignored when operation mode is Stop mode.
(7) Internal device task program processing
Here describes the processing method of international device task program which extended the task (start
condition) of task program from contact point to device as execution range.
(a) Items to be set in Task
Set the execution condition and priority to the task being executed. Check the task no. for task
management.
(b) Internal device task processing
After completing the scan program execution in CPU module, if the condition that becomes the start
condition of internal device task program is met, according to the priority, it shall be executed.
5-16
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(c) Precautions in using internal device task program
1) Accordingly, even if the execution condition of internal device task program occurs in Scan Program
or Task Program (Cycle time, I/O), it shall not be executed immediately but executed at the time of
completion of Scan Program.
2) If the demand to execute Internal Device Task Program occurs, the execution condition shall be
examined at the time of completion of Scan Program. Accordingly, if the execution condition of Internal
Device Task occurs by Scan Program or Task Program (Cycle time) during ‘1 scan’ and disappears, the
task shall not be executed as it is not possible to detect the execution at the time of examination of
execution condition.
(8) Verification of task program
(a) Is the task setting proper?
If task occurs frequently more than needed or several tasks occur in one scan at the same time, scan time
may lengthen or be irregular. In case not possible to change the task setting, verify max. scan time.
(b) Is the priority of task arranged well?
The low priority task program shall be delayed by the high priority task program, which results in disabling
the processing within the correct time and even task collision may occur as next task occurs in the state
that the execution of previous task is delayed. Consider the emergency of task and execution time etc
when setting the priority.
(c) Is the Task Program written in shortest?
If the execution time of Task Program is longer, scan time may lengthen or be irregular. Even it may cause
the collision of task program. Write the execution time as short as possible. (Especially, when writing the
cyclic task program, write the execution time so that the task program can be executed within 10% cycle
of the shortest task among several tasks.)
(d) Is program protection for the high priority task needed during program execution?
If other task is inserted during task program execution, complete the task in execution and operate the
standby tasks in the order of high priority. In case that it is not allowed to insert other task in Scan
Program, prevent the insert partially by using ‘DI’ and ‘EI’ application instruction. The problem may occur
while processing the global variables used commonly with other program or special or communication
module.
(9) Program configuration and processing example
If task and program are registered as below.
| Interrupt type | Interrupt name | Priority | Task No. | Program |
| Cycle time | 10 ㎳_cycle time | 3 | 0 | Program 1 |
| Internal device | Internal device_%MX0 | 5 | 16 | Program 2 |
| I/O | I/O_%IX0.0.0 | 2 | 8 | Program 3 |
1) Scan program name: “ Scan Program”
2) Execution time respective program: Scan program = 17 ㎳, Program 1 = 2 ㎳, Program 2= 7 ㎳,
Program 3 = 2 ㎳
5-17
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
| Process per time | |
| Time (㎳) | Process |
| 0 | Scan started and scan program started to execute. |
| 0~6 | Scan program is executed. |
| 6~8 | Scan program is stop because execution external I/O (P000) is requested. And program 3 is executed. Request of execution at 7[ms] is ignored because program 3 has been executing. |
| 8~10 | Program 3 is finished and Scan program is continued. |
| 10~12 | Scan program is stop by request of ‘10 ㎳_Cycle time’ interrupt signal and execute program 1. |
| 12~20 | Program 1 is finished and Scan program is continued. |
| 20 | Request of ‘Cycle time’ interrupt signal and ‘External I/O (P000)’ signal is occurred concurrently but priority of ‘External I/O’ signal is higher than ‘Cycle time’ interrupt signal so program 3 is executed and program 1 is standby. |
| 20~22 | Program 3 is finished and Scan program is continued. |
| 22~24 | After program 3 is completed, program 1 (the program of ‘10ms_Cycle time’ is executed. |
| 24~25 | P1 execution completed and the stopped scan program execution finished |
| 25 | At the finished point of scan program, check the request of Internal device ‘M000’ execution and execute program 2. |
| 25~30 | Program P2 is executed. |
| 30~32 | When ‘10 ㎳_Cycle time’ interrupt signal is occurred, the priority of that is higher than Internal device ‘M000’ though program 2 is stopped and program 1 is executed. |
| 32~34 | P1 executed completed and the stopped P2 execution finished |
| 34 | New scan starts (Start scan program execution) |
PO executed
P1 executed
10ms_Cycle time
Program 2
Internal device_%MX0
Program 3
External I/O_%IX0.0.0
Time
0 6 7 8 10 12 20 22 24 25 30 32 34
Scan started
(Initial operation started) Scan program stopped New scan started
5-18
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
| 5.3 Operation Mode |
For operation mode of CPU module, there are 3 types such as RUN mode, STOP mode and DEBUG mode..
Here describes the operation processing of each operation mode.
5.3.1 RUN mode
This is the mode to executed program operation normally.
(1) Processing at mode change
At the beginning, execute initialization of data area and examine the effectiveness of program and judge the
possibility of execution.
(2) Operation processing contents
Execute I/O refresh and program operation.
(a) Detects the start condition of Interrupt Program and executes Interrupt Program.
(b) Examines the normal operation or missing of built-in module.
(c) Communication service and other internal processing.
RUN mode first scan start
| Initialize data area |
| Examine Program effectiveness and judge the possibility of execution |
Execute input refresh
| Program execute, Interrupt Program execute |
Communication service and internal processing
Execute output refresh
Operation
mode change
RUN mode keep
Change to other mode
Operation by changed operation
mode
Examine the normal operation or missing of
built-in module
5-19
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
5.3.2 STOP mode
This is the mode in stop state without Program operation. It is available to transmit the program through XG5000
only in Remote STOP mode.
(1) Processing at Mode Change
Clear the output image area and execute output refresh.
(2) Operation Processing Contents
(a) Executes I/O refresh.
(b) Examines the normal operation or missing of built-in module.
(c) Communication service or other internal processing.
5.3.3 DEBUG mode
This is the mode to detect Program error or trace the operation process and the conversion to this mode is
available only in STOP mode. This is the mode to check the program execution state and the contents of each
data and verify the program.
(1) Processing at mode change
(a) Initializes the data area at the beginning of mode change.
(b) Clears the output image area and execute input refresh.
(2) Operation processing contents
(a) Executes I/O refresh.
(b) Debug operation according to setting state.
(c) After finishing Debug operation by the end of Program, execute output refresh.
(d) Examine the normal operation or missing of built-in module.
(e) Executes communication service or other service.
(3) Debug operation
It describes debug mode.
5-20
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
| Item | Description | Remark |
| Start/Stop Debugging | Change the debug ↔ stop mode | |
| Go | It starts debug operation. | |
| Step Over | It operates by 1 step. | |
| Step Into | It starts the subroutine program. | Other operation is identical to Step Over. |
| Step Out | It finished the subroutine program. | |
| Go to Cursor | It operates to current cursor position. | |
| Set/Remove Breakpoints |
Set/Removes current cursor position to break points. |
|
| Breakpoints List | It displays list of breakpoints. | |
| Breakpoint Conditions |
It specifies device value and number of scan. |
(a) Set/Remove Breakpoints
▪ Sets breakpoint at current cursor position. After breakpoint setting, (breakpoint setting indicator) is
displayed.
(b) Go
▪ Run the program to breakpoint. At break-pointer (stop indicator) is displayed.
error 1
error 2
error1
error2
5-21
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(c) Step Over
▪ Run the program to next step. At break point, Step over indicator is displayed.
(d) Breakpoint List
▪ It displays current Breakpoint List. It supports Select All, Reset All, Goto, Remove, Remove All.
error 1
error 2
5-22
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
(e) Break condition
▪ It sets Device Break and Scan Break.
| Remark |
| 1) Refer to XG5000 Users Manual ‘Chapter 12 Debugging’ for detailed information. |
5-23
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
5.3.4 Change operation mode
(1) Operation Mode Change Method
The method to change operation mode are as follows.
(a) By mode key of CPU module
(b) By connecting the programming tool (XG5000) to communication port of CPU
(c) By changing the operation mode of other CPU module connected to network by XG5000 connected to
communication port of CPU.
(d) By using XG5000, HMI, computer link module connected to network
(e) By ‘STOP‘ instruction during program execution
(2) Type of operation mode
The operation mode setting is as follows.
| Operation mode switch | XG5000 command | Operation mode |
| RUN | - | Run |
| STOP | RUN | Remote Run |
| STOP | Remote Stop | |
| Debug | Debug Run | |
| Mode change | Previous operation mode | |
| RUN -> STOP | - | Stop |
(a) Remote mode conversion is available only in the state of ‘Remote Enabled: On’, ‘Mode switch: Stop’.
In case of changing the Remote ‘RUN’ mode to ‘STOP’ by switch, operate the switch as follows.
(STOP) RUN STOP .
| Warning |
| In case of changing Remote RUN mode to RUN mode by switch, PLC operation continues the operation without interruption. It is available to modify during RUN in RUN mode by switch but the mode change operation by XG5000 is limited. This should be set only in case that remote mode change is not allowed. |
5-24
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
| 5.4 Memory |
There are two types of memory in CPU module that the user can use. One is Program Memory that saves the
user program written by the user to build the system, and the other is Data Memory that provides the device area
to save the data during operation.
5.4.1 Program memory
Contents and size of program memory are as follows.
| Item | Size |
| Program memory entire area | 1.76 MB |
| System area: System program area Backup area |
512 KB |
| Parameter area: Basic parameter area I/O parameter area High speed link parameter area P2P parameter area Interrupt setting information area Reserved area |
48 KB |
| Execution program area: Scan program area Task program area |
200 KB |
| Program reserved area Scan program backup area Task program area Upload area User defined function/function block area Variable initialization information area Reserved variable assignment information area Reserved area |
1 MB |
5-25
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
5.4.2 Data memory
Contents and size of data memory are as follows.
| Item | Size | |
| Data memory entire area | 256 KB | |
| System area : I/O information table Forced I/O table Reserved area |
143 KB | |
| Flag area | System flag (F) | 2 KB |
| Analog image flag (U) | 1 KB | |
| Internal special flag (K) | 8 KB | |
| High speed link (L) | 4 KB | |
| P2P flag (N) | 10 KB | |
| Input image area (%I) | 2 KB | |
| Output image area (%Q) | 2 KB | |
| R area (%R) | 20 KB | |
| Direct variable area (%M) | 16 KB | |
| Symbolic variable area (maximum) | 32 KB | |
| Stack area | 16 KB |
5.4.3 Data retain area setting
In case you want to keep the data necessary for operation and the data made during operation when PLC
stops and restarts, Default(automatic) Variable Retain is used and some area of M area can be set as
Retain area through parameter setting
The following is characteristic table about the device available for Retain setting
| Device | Retain setting |
Characteristic |
| Default | O | As for automatic variable area, Retain setting is available |
| M | O | As for internal contact point area, Retain setting is available at parameter |
| K | X | In case of power failure, contact point is kept |
| F | X | System flag area |
| U | X | Analog data register (Retain is not available) |
| L | X | High speed link/P2P service status contact point of communication module (Retain is available) |
| N | X | P2P service address area of communication module (Retain is available) |
| R | X | Flash memory dedicated area (Retain is available) |
| Remark |
| 1) K, L, N, R devices are retained basically. 2) K, L, N devices can be deleted through “Clear PLC” of XG5000 online menu. 3) For more detail, refer to “Online” of XG5000 user manual. |
5-26
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
1) Initialization of data according to restart mode
There are three variable related with restart mode (Default, initialization and retain variable). Initialization
method about each variable in case of executing restart mode is as follows.
2) Operation of data retain area
Method on deleting the Retain data is as follows.
- RESET through XG5000 (Overall Reset)
- Execute “Clear PLC” through XG5000 at STOP mode
- Writing by program (Initialization program recommended)
- Writing ‘0’ FILL etc at XG5000 monitor mode
For holding of retain area data or reset (clear) operation according to PLC operation, refer to the following
table.
| Classification | Retain | M area Retain | R area |
| Reset | Hold previous value | Hold previous value | Hold previous value |
| Overall reset | Initialized as ‘0’ | Initialized as ‘0’ | Hold previous value |
| STOP→RUN | Hold previous value | Hold previous value | Hold previous value |
| Remark |
| 1) Terms on three types of variable are as follows. (1) Default variable : variable not set as INIT or Retain variable (2) INIT variable : initial value is set (3) Retain variable : Holds previous value |
3) Initialization of data
If PLC becomes ‘Cleat Memory’ status, memory of all devices are deleted as ‘0’. When you want to specify
initial value, use initialization task. At CPU module, there are two types of built-in memory. One is program
memory to save program made by user, for user to structure system, Another is data memory providing device
area saving data during operation.
| Mode Variable assignment |
COLD | WARM |
| Default | Initialized as ‘0’ | Initialized as ‘0’ |
| Retain | Initialized as ‘0’ | Hold previous value |
| Initialization | Initialized as user defined value | Initialized as user defined value |
| Retain & Initialization | Initialized as user defined value | Hold previous value |
5-27
Chapter 5 Program Configuration and Operation Method
5.4.4 Data Memory Map
User program area
| Parameter area |
| User program area (200 KB) |
Data area
Automatic variable
Z127 (32 KB)
Z000
Input variable
(2 KB) “I”
%IX0.0.0
%IX15.15.63
Output variable
(2 KB) “Q”
%QX0.0.0
%QX15.15.63
Direct variable M area
%MW8188 (16 KB) “M”
%MW0
Direct variable R area
%RW10236 (20 KB) “R”
%RW0
Direct variable W area
%WW10236 (20 KB) “W”
%WW0
Direct variable F area
%FW1020 (2 KB) “F”
%FW0
Direct variable K area
%KW4092 (8 KB) “K”
%KW0
Direct variable L area
(4 KB)
%LW2044 “L”
%LW0
Direct variable N area
%NW5116 (10 KB) “N”
%NW0
Direct variable U area
%UW0.15.31 (1 KB) “U”
%UW0.0.0
5-28
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.1 Type Setting |
It describes setting of XGB PLC type.
| PLC Series |
CPU type | Language | Description | Reference |
| XGB | XGB-DR16C3 | MK language |
Dedicated product | Module type |
| XGB-XBMS | MK language |
“S” type : XBM-DN16/32S , XBM DR16S |
Module type | |
| XGB-XBCH | MK language |
“H” type : XBC-DR32/64H , XBC DN32/64H |
Compact type |
|
| XGB-XECH | IEC language |
“H” type : XEC-DR32/64H , XEC DN32/64H, XEC-DP32/64H |
Compact type |
| Remark |
| ▪ In case type is different, connection is not available. |
6-1
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.2 Parameter Setting |
This paragraph describes how to set parameters.
6.2.1 Basic parameter setting
Clicking Basic Parameter in the project window shows the following window.
There are three main options ; “Basic Operation Setup” , “Device Area Setup” and “Error Operation
Setup”.
| Category | Item | Description | Note |
| Basic operations |
Fixed period operation |
Set the time of fixed period operation. | 1~999 ㎳ |
| Watchdog timer | Set the time of scan watchdog. | 10~1000 ㎳ | |
| Standard input filter | Set the time of standard input filter. | 1,3,5,10,20,70,100 ㎳ | |
| Restart mode | Set restart mode | Allowance/Prohibition | |
| Output during debugging |
Set whether to allow output actually during debugging operation. |
Allowance/Prohibition | |
| Keep output when an error occurs |
Set whether to preserve output holding function set in I/O parameter in case of error. |
Allowance/Prohibition | |
| Memory area setting |
Select latch area | Set Retain range about M area | - |
| Pause/Resume |
6-2
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
6.2.2 I/O parameter setting
This setting is to set and reserve each I/O information. Clicking 『I/O Parameter』 in the project
window shows the following setting window.
Clicking 『Module』 in 『Slot Position』 indicates a list of modules, in which you may set I/O
corresponding to the actual system. Then, the following window is displayed.
Clicking 『Details』 in 『Slot Position』 shows the following window to set filter and emergency output.
| Remark |
| (1) If settings are different with I/O module actually accessed, “Inconsistent module type error” occurs, displaying error. (2) Without settings, CPU reads each I/O module information and operates. |
6-3
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.3 Self-diagnosis Function |
6.3.1 Saving of error log
CPU module logs errors occurred so that the causes will be identified and fixed easily. Clicking
『Error/Warning』 of 『Online』 shows the current error and previous error log.
| Item | Description | Remarks |
| Error/Warning | Display the current error/warning. | - |
| Error Log | Display a log of error/warning occurred. | Saving up to 100 |
| Remark |
| (1) Saved data are not deleted until selecting a menu of XG5000 and clicking “Delete”. (2) “H” type displays Data and Time. |
6.3.2 Troubleshooting
(1) Trouble types
Trouble occurs due to PLC itself, system configuration error or abnormal operation result detected. Trouble
is divided into trouble mode stopping operation for the safety and warning mode generating alert to user
with a mode in trouble.
The causes troubling PLC system are as follows.
(a) PLC hardware trouble
(b) System configuration error
(c) Operation error while operating user program
(d) Error detected owing to external device in trouble
6-4
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
(2) Operation mode if trouble occurs
PLC system logs any trouble occurred in flag and determines whether to stop or resume operation
depending on trouble mode.
(a) PLC hardware trouble
In case an error occurs so that PLC such as CPU module and power module may not work normally,
the system is halted, but any warning may not interfere with the operation.
(b) Operation error while operating user program
Representing an error occurred during operation of user program, in case of numeric operation error,
it displays the error in error flag but the system resumes operating. However, if the operation time
exceeds by the operation monitoring time limit and I/O module does not control it normally, the system
is halted.
(c) Error detected owing to external device in trouble
Representing the detection of external device to be controlled by users program of PLC, if an error is
detected, the system is halted, but any warning may not interfere with the operation.
| Remark |
| (1) If any trouble occurs, the trouble content is saved in a special relay %FD1. (2) For details of flag, refer to the appendix 1 Flag List. |
6-5
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.4 Remote Functions |
CPU module may change operation by communication as well as by key switches mounted on the module. To
operate it remotely, it is necessary to set ‘RUN/STOP’ switch to ‘STOP’.
(1) Remote operations are as follows.
(a) Operable by accessing to XG5000 through RS-232C port mounted on CPU module.
(b) Can operate other PLC connected to PLC network with CPU module connected to XG5000.
(2) Remote RUN/STOP
(a) Remote RUN/STOP is the externally controlled RUN/STOP function.
(b) It is convenient when CPU module is located at a position hard to control or when CPU module
within control panel is to control RUN/STOP function remotely.
(3) Remote DEBUG
(a) it manages debugging remotely when remote mode is STOP. Namely, DEBUG operation is to execute
program operation depending on designated operation conditions.
(b) Remote DEBUG is a convenient function when confirming program operation status or data during
system debugging.
(4) Remote Reset
(a) Remote reset is to reset CPU module remotely if an error occurs at a place hard to directly control
CPU module.
(b) Like operation by switches, it supports ‘Reset’ and ‘Overall Reset’.
| Remark |
| For details regarding remote functions, refer to ‘Online’ of XG5000 Users Manual. |
6-6
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.5 Forced Input/Output On and Off Function |
Force I/O function is used to force to turn I/O areas on or off, regardless of program results.
6.5.1 Force I/O setup
Click『 Online 』 -『 Force I/O 』 .
| Item | Description | |
| Move address | Select base and slot | |
| Application | Set whether to allow or not Force I/O | |
| Single | Flag | Set whether to allow or not Force I/O by bits. |
| Data | Set Force I/O data on or off by bits. | |
| Select All | Set to allow Force I/O with all I/O area on | |
| Delete All | Delete to allow Force I/O with all I/O area off. | |
| Setting device | Display I/O area set as a bit. |
6-7
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
6.5.2 Processing time and processing method of Force Input/Output On and Off
(1) Forced Input
Regarding input, at the time of input refresh it replaces the data of contact set as Force On/Off among
data read from input module with the data as Force and updates input image area. Therefore, user
program executes operations with actual input data while Force input area is operated with data set as
Force.
(2) Forced Output
Regarding output, at the time of output refresh upon the execution user program operation, it replaces
the data of contact set as Force On/Off among data of output image area containing operation results
with data set as Force and outputs the data in output module. Unlike (Force) input, the output image
area is not changed by Force On/Off setting.
(3) Cautions when using Force I/O function
(a) It operates from the time when I/O is individually set as ‘Allow’ after setting Force data.
(b) It is possible to set Force input although I/O module is not actually mounted.
(c) Despite of the power changed Off -> On, operation mode changes or any operation by pressing reset
key, the data of which On/Off is set before is kept in CPU module.
(d) Even in STOP mode, Force I/O data is not removed.
(e) To set new data from the beginning, it is necessary to deselect all settings of I/O by using ‘Delete All’
option.
6-8
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.6 Direct Input/Output Operation |
Refreshing I/O operates after completion of scan program. If data of I/O is changed while program is
scanned, it does not refreshed at the changed moment. Refreshed I/O data is applied after ‘END’ instruction
on program.
In order to refresh I/O data during program execution, use ‘DIREC_IN, DIREC_OUT’ function to read input
contact point immediately and use it for operation, or output operation result immediately.
Program outputting data 2#0111_0111_0111_0111 to 32 point transistor output model equipped at
extension module slot 4 during scan.
(1) Input base number 0 and slot number 4 where output module is equipped
(2) Since data to output is 16 bit during scan, enable lower 16 bit among value of MASK_L
(16#FFFF0000)
(3) If execution condition (%IX0.0.0) is On, DIREC_O (Immediate refresh of output module) is executed
and data of output module is set as 2#0111_0111_0111_0111.
| Remark |
| 1) For detail of DIREC_IN,DIREC_OUT function, refer to XGI/XGR/XEC instruction manual 2) In case of using DIREC_IN,DIREC_OUT function, the value is applied immediately. They have higher priority than forced I/O. |
6-9
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.7 Diagnosis of External Device |
This flag is provided for a user to diagnose any fault of external device and, in turn, execute halt or warning of
the system. Use of this flag displays faults of external device without any complicated program prepared and
monitors fault location without any specific device (XG5000 and etc) or source program.
1) Detection and classification of faults in external device
(1) The trouble (fault) of external device may be detected by user program and largely divided, depending
on the type, into error and warning; the former requires halt of PLC operation and the latter simply
displays the status while PLC keeps working.
(2) ‘Heavy trouble’ uses ‘ _ANC_ERR’ flag and ‘Light trouble’ uses ‘_ANC_WB’ flag.
2) Heavy trouble of external device
(1) In case of detecting heavy trouble of external device at user program, write error code defined by user at
system flag ‘ANC_ERR’ and turn on _CHK_ANC_ERR flag. If _CHK_ANC_ERR flag is on, at the end
of scan, ‘_ANNUN_ER’ bit of ‘_CNF_ER’, system error representative flag, is on and PLC turns off all
output of output module (it can be different according to the setting of basic parameter) and becomes
error status (Error LED flickers with 1s cycle)
(2) In case of heavy trouble, you can know the reason by checking ‘_ANC_ERR' flag.
(3) To turn off the ERR LED caused by flag detecting heavy trouble of external device, reset or restart PLC
Example)
3) Light trouble of external device
(1) In case of detecting heavy trouble of external device at user program, write error code defined by user at
system flag ‘ANC_WAR’ and turn on _CHK_ANC_WAR flag. If _CHK_ANC_WAR flag is on, at the end
of scan, ‘_ANNUN_WAR’ bit of ‘_CNF_WAR’, system warning representative flag, is on. When light
trouble occurs, LED flickers with 2s cycle.
(2) In case of heavy trouble, you can know the reason by checking ‘_ANC_WAR' flag.
(3) If _CHK_ANC_WAR is off, light trouble status is canceled and Error LED is off.
Example)
Error
Error
6-10
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.8 Allocation of Input/Output Number |
Allocation of I/O number is to allocate an address to every I/O of each module to read data from input module
and output data to output module when it executes operations.
XGB series adopts each I/O 64 points occupation to every module.
(1) Allocation of I/O number
64 points are allocated to every module (incl. special, communication).
| System Configuration | |||
| Number of Connection stage |
Type | I/O allocation | Remarks |
| 0 | XEC DN32H |
Input : %IX0.0.0 ~ %IX0.0.63 Output: %QX0.0.0 ~ %QX0.0.63 |
Real input : %IX0.0.0 ~ %IX0.0.15 Real output: %QX0.0.0 ~ %QX0.0.15 |
| 1 | XBE DC32A |
Input : %IX0.1.0 ~ %IX0.1.63 Output: %QX0.1.0 ~ %QX0.1.63 |
Real input : %IX0.1.0 ~ %IX0.1.31 |
| 2 | XBE TN32A |
Input : %IX0.2.0 ~ %IX0.2.63 Output: %QX0.2.0 ~ %QX0.2.63 |
Real output: %QX0.2.0 ~ %QX0.2.31 |
| 3 | XBL-C41A | Input : %IX0.3.0 ~ %IX0.3.63 Output: %QX0.3.0 ~ %QX0.3.63 |
- |
| 4 | XBF AD04A |
Input : %IX0.4.0 ~ %IX0.4.63 Output: %QX0.4.0 ~ %QX0.4.63 |
- |
| 5 | XBF DV04A |
Input : %IX0.5.0 ~ %IX0.5.63 Output: %QX0.5.0 ~ %QX0.5.63 |
- |
| 6 | XBE DC32A |
Input : %IX0.6.0 ~ %IX0.6.63 Output: %QX0.6.0 ~ %QX0.6.63 |
Real input : %IX0.6.0 ~ %IX0.6.31 |
| 7 | XBE TN32A |
Input : %IX0.7.0 ~ %IX0.7.63 Output: %QX0.7.0 ~ %QX0.7.63 |
Real output: %QX0.7.0 ~ %QX0.7.31 |
Empty I/O point is available for internal relay.
6-11
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
In case of using monitor function of XG5000, I/O allocation information is displayed.
I/O contact point
allocation information
Description of each module
6-12
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.9 Online Editing |
It is possible to modify program and communication parameter during operation of PLC without control
operation stopped. The following describes basic modification. For details of modifying program, refer to
XG5000 Users Manual.
Items to be modified during operation are as follows.
• Program
• Communication parameter
(1) It displays programs that are currently running.
(2) Click 『Online』 -『Start Online Editing』 .
6-13
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
(3) If you modify program, background color changes to indicates start of online editing.
(4) Upon the modification of program, click 『Online』 -『Write Modified Program』 .
6-14
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
(5) Upon the writing of program, click 『Online』 -『End Online Editing』 .
(6) The program background returns and the program modification during run is completed.
| Remark |
| ▪ For parameter modification during run, change each parameter on XG-PD and click『Online』 -『Write Modified Program 』 . |
6-15
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.10 Reading Input/Output Information |
It monitors information of individual modules consisted of XGB series system.
(1) Click『Online』 -『I/O Info』 . Then, information of each module connected to the system is monitored.
(2) If clicking Details after selecting a module, it displays detail information of a selected module.
6-16
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.11 Monitoring |
It monitors system information of XGB series system.
(1) Clicking『Monitor』 displays the following sub-menus.
(2) Items and descriptions
| Item | Description | Remarks |
| Start/Stop Monitoring | Designate the start and stop of monitor. | Click for reverse turn. |
| Pause | Pause monitoring. | - |
| Resume | Resume paused monitor. | - |
| Pausing Conditions | Pause monitoring if a preset value of device corresponds to condition. |
Monitor resumes; clicking for resume. |
| Change Current Value | Change the present value of currently selected device. |
- |
| System Monitoring | Monitor general system information. | - |
| Device Monitoring | Monitor by device (type). | - |
| Trend Monitoring | Monitor trend of device set in the system. | For details, refer to XG5000 Users Manual. |
| Custom Events | Monitor the value of device set when an event set by a user occurs. |
|
| Data Traces | Trace the value of device. |
6-17
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
(a) Change current value
It changes the current value of each device selected in the current program window.
(b) Device monitoring
It monitors by device (type).
6-18
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
(c) Pausing conditions
It stops monitoring in case a device value set in the program corresponds.
(d) Trend monitoring
It displays device values graphically.
6-19
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
(e) Custom events
1) It monitors detail information when an event set by a user occurs. Additional user event may be
registered.
2) It sets basic setting and relative device.
If rising edge of %MX0 device occurs, it records the message of an alarm, “Out of order Water Tank 1”
and the device values of DATA (%MW0), %MW100, tog_4s device are recorded.
3) Set the relative device(s).
6-20
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
4) Monitor event history of custom event.
5) Double-clicking a number produced monitors the relative values of device and the detail message as
follows.
| Remark |
| ▪For details of monitor, refer to XG5000 Users Manual. |
6-21
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.12 RTC function |
XGB PLC supports the RTC (clock) function and user can use this function for time management of
system or error log. RTC function is executed steadily when power is off or instantaneous power cut
status. Current time of RTC is renewed every scan by system operation status information flag.
6.12.1 How to use
(1) Reading/setting clock data
(a) Reading or setting from XG5000
1) Click『Online』의『PLC Information』 .
2) Click PLC RTC tap of PLC Information』 .
3) In case the user wants to send the clock of PC to PLC, press ‘Synchronize PLC with PC clock’.
4) In case the user wants to send the clock the user wants, change the setting value of Time box
and press ‘Send to PLC’.
(b) Reading by flag
The user can monitor as follows by flag
| Flag for RTC | Data | Contents |
| _MON_YEAR | h0599 | 99 year 5 month |
| _TIME_DAY | h1512 | 12 date 15 hour |
| _SEC_MIN | h4142 | 42 minute 41 second |
| _HUND_WK | h2001 | 20xx year, Monday |
Time data of _TIME_DAY is indicated as 24 hour type.
6-22
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
(c) Modification of clock data by program
You can set clock data by program.
It is used when you make system to set clock manually by external Digit switch or modify clock
periodically through network.
‘RTC-SET’ function block is used to write the clock data to a clock. If you input the clock data and
execute the function block, it writes the clock data to a clock at the scan end. For further
information, refer to an instruction manual.
There is another method not using a function block. Input the clock data at the following area and
turn ON ‘_RTC_WR’.
| Flag for writing clock | Content | Setting range |
| _MON_YEAR_DT | Month/Year | 1984 ~ 2163 year, 1 ~12 month |
| _TIME_DAY_DT | Hour/day | 1 ~ 31 day, 0 ~ 23 hour |
| _SEC_MIN_DT | Second/Minute | 0 ~ 59 minute, 0 ~59 second |
| _HUND_WK_DT | Hundred year/date | 0 ~ 6 |
You can write clock data without using function block. Write clock data at the above area and turn
on ‘_RTC_WR’.
• When form of clock data is wrong, the value is not written.
(But when date is wrong, error is not detected and written itself.)
• After writing clock data, monitor clock-related device for check
(d) How to express the date
| Number | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 |
| Date | Sunday | Monday | Tuesday | Wednesday | Thursday | Friday | Saturday |
(2) Deviation of clock data
±2.2s / 1 d
| (1) Initially, RTC may not have any clock data. (2) When using the CPU module, first make sure to set the accurate clock data. (3) If any data out of the clock data range is written into RTC, it does not work properly. i.e.) 14M 32D 25H (4) RTC may stop or have an error due to abnormal battery and other causes. The error is released if a new clock data is written. |
| Remark |
6-23
Chapter 6 CPU Functions
| 6.13 External Memory Module |
You can save user program safely or download user program to PLC without special handling when user
program is damaged by using external memory module in XGB PLC
.
6.13.1 Structure
6.13.2 How to use
With the following handling, you can run PLC with program saved in memory module.
(1) Save user program at external memory module
(a) Set switch of memory module as 0
(b) Install memory module at the RS-232C port of main unit
- After installation, program and parameter is saved into memory module and READ LED is on
- If Saving program and parameter is complete, READ LED is off
(c) separate memory module from main unit.
(2) Save user program of external memory module at main unit
(a) Set operation mode of main unit as STOP
- In RUN mode, you can’t save program
(b) Set switch of memory module as 1.
(c) Install memory module
- Install it at the RS-232C port of main unit.
- If PLC program and parameter is written, WRITE LED is on.
- If saving program and parameter is complete, WRITE LED is off.
(d) If you change operation mode of PLC into RUN, PLC operates with program and parameter saved
in memory module.
(3) In case LED flickers
(a) When you execute writing of memory module in case operation mode of PLC is RUN.
(WRITE LED flickers)
(b) When the PLC type of program of memory module doesn’t correspond with actual PLC type.
(WRITE LED flickers)
(c) When mode switch of memory module is not “0”, “1” (RUN LED flickers)
(d) When interface with main unit is not normal (READ LED flickers)
-. Program and parameter of XG5000, parameter and information about link enabled are all saved.
-. Don’t run PLC while external memory module is installed.
-. When READ/WRITE LED is on, don’t remove memory module.
Remark
RS-232C connector
RUN LED
WRITE LED
READ LED
0 : READ mode
1 : WRITE mode
6-24
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| 7.1 Introduction |
Here describes the notices when selecting digital I/O module used for XGB series.
(1) For the type of digital input, there are two types such as current sink input and current source
input.
(2) The number of max. Simultaneous input contact point is different according to module type. It
depends on the input voltage, ambient temperature. Use input module after checking the
specification.
(3) When response to high speed input is necessary, use interrupt input contact point. Up to 8
interrupt points are supported.
(4) In case that open/close frequency is high or it is used for conductive load open/close, use
Transistor output module or triac output module as the durability of Relay Output Module shall
be reduced.
(5) For output module to run the conductive (L) load, max. open/close frequency should be used
by 1second On, 1 second Off.
(6) For output module, in case that counter timer using DC/DC Converter as a load was used,
Inrush current may flow in a certain cycle when it is ON or during operation. In this case, if
average current is selected, it may cause the failure. Accordingly, if the previous load was
used, it is recommended to connect resistor or inductor to the load in serial in order to reduce
the impact of Inrush current or use the large module having a max. load current value.
| Output module |
Resistor Load
| L |
Inductor Load
7-1
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
(7) Relay life of Relay output module is shown as below.
Max. life of Relay used in Relay output module is shown as below.
Open/Close times (× 10000)
100
50
30
20
10
0.5 1 2 3 5 10 100
Open/Close current (A)
| C | 2 | 5 | Resis | tive | lo | d |
| C | 3 | 0 | Resisti | ve l | a |
AC 125V Resistive load
7-2
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
(8) A clamped terminal with sleeve can not be used for the XGB terminal strip. The clamped terminals
suitable for terminal strip are as follows (JOR 1.25-3:Daedong Electricity in Korea).
(9) The cable size connected to a terminal strip should be 0.3~0.75 ㎟ stranded cable and 2.8 ㎜ thick.
The cable may have different current allowance depending on the insulation thickness.
(10) The coupling torque available for fixation screw and terminal strip screw should follow the table below.
| Coupling position | Coupling torque range |
| IO module terminal strip screw (M3 screw) | 42 ~ 58 N·㎝ |
| IO module terminal strip fixation screw (M3 screw) |
66 ~ 89 N·㎝ |
(11) Relay life graph is not written based on real use. (This is not a guaranteed value). So consider margin.
Relay life is specified under following condition.
(a) Rated voltage, load: 3 million times: 100 million times
(b) 200V AC 1.5A, 240V AC 1A (COS¢ =0.7): 1 million times
(c) 200V AC 0.4A, 240V AC 0.3A (COS¢ =0.7): 3 million times
(d) 200V AC 1A, 240V AC 0.5A (COS¢ =0.35): 1 million times
(e) 200V AC 0.3A, 240V AC 0.15A (COS¢ =0.35): 3 million times
(f) 24V DC 1A, 100V DC 0.1A (L/R=7ms): 1million times
(g) 24V DC 0.3A, 100V DC 0.03A (L/R=7ms): 3million times
(12) Noise can be inserted into input module. To prevent this noise, the user can set filter for input delay in
parameter. Consider the environment and set the input filter time.
| Input filter time (ms) | Noise signal pulse size (ms) | Reference |
| 1 | 0.3 | |
| 3 | 1.8 | Initial value |
| 5 | 3 | |
| 10 | 6 | |
| 20 | 12 | |
| 70 | 45 | |
| 100 | 60 |
6.0mm or less 6.0mm or less
7-3
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
(a) Setting input filter
1) Click I/O Parameter』 in the project window of XG5000
2) Click『Module』 at the slot location.
7-4
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
3) Set I/O module really equipped.
4) After setting I/O module, click Input Filter.
5) Set filter value.
7-5
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
(b) Setting output status in case of error
1) Click Emergency Out in the I/O parameter setting window.
2) Click Emergency Output.
If it is selected as Clear, the output will be Off and if Hold is selected, the output will be kept.
7-6
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| 7.2 Digital Input Specifications of Main Unit |
7.2.1 XEC-DR32H / XEC-DN32H input unit (Source/Sink type)
| Model Specification |
Main unit | ||||
| XEC-DN32H(/DC) XEC-DP32H |
XEC-DR32H | XEC-DR32H/D1 | |||
| Input point | 16 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated input voltage | DC24V | DC12/24V | |||
| Rated input current | About 4 ㎃ (point 0~7: About 10 ㎃) | About 5/10mA (point 0~7: about 7/15mA) |
|||
| Operation voltage range | DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%) | DC9.5~30V (ripple rate < 5%) |
|||
| On Voltage/Current | DC19V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher | DC9V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher | |||
| Off Voltage/Current | DC6V or less / 1 ㎃ or less | DC 5V or less / 1 ㎃ or less |
|||
| Input resistance | About 5.6 ㏀ (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7: About 2.7 ㏀) | About 2.7 ㏀ (%IX0.0.0 ~%IX0.0.7: About 1.8 ㏀) |
|||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1/3/5/10/20/70/100 ㎳ (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3 ㎳ | |||
| On → Off | |||||
| Insulation pressure | AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m) | ||||
| Insulation resistance | 10 ㏁ or more by Mega ohmmeter | ||||
| Common method | 16 point / COM | ||||
| Proper cable size | 0.3 ㎟ | ||||
| Current consumption | 200 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Input On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 24 points connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw) | ||||
| Weight | 500g | 600g | |||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | No. | Conta ct | Type |
| TB1 | RX | ||||
| TB2 | 485+ | ||||
| TB3 | TX | ||||
| TB4 | 485- | ||||
| TB5 | SG | ||||
| TB6 | 00 | ||||
| TB7 | 01 | ||||
| TB8 | 02 | ||||
| TB9 | 03 | ||||
| TB10 | 04 | ||||
| TB11 | 05 | ||||
| TB12 | 06 | ||||
| TB13 | 07 | ||||
| TB14 | 08 | ||||
| TB15 | 09 | ||||
| TB16 | 10 | ||||
| TB17 | 11 | ||||
| TB18 | 12 | ||||
| TB19 | 13 | ||||
| TB20 | 14 | ||||
| TB21 | 15 | ||||
| TB22 | COM | ||||
| TB23 | 24G |
| DC24V 0 F B10 COM A03 B02 |
R Photocoupler |
| Terminal block no. |
Internal
circuit
R
7-7
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| TB24 | 24V |
7.2.2 XEC-DR64H / XEC-DN64H input unit (Source/Sink Type)
| Model Specification |
Main unit | ||||
| XEC-DN64H | XEC-DR64H | XEC-DR64H/D1 | |||
| Input point | 32 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated input voltage | DC24V | DC 12/24V | |||
| Rated input current | About 4 ㎃ (point 0~7: About 10 ㎃) | About 5/10 ㎃ (point 0~7: About 7/15 ㎃) |
|||
| Operation voltage range | DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%) | DC 9.5~30V (ripple rate < 5%) |
|||
| On Voltage/Current | DC19V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher | DC9V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher |
|||
| Off Voltage/Current | DC6V or less / 1 ㎃ or less | DC5V or less / 1 ㎃ or less | |||
| Input resistance | About 5.6 ㏀ (%IX0.0.0~%IX0.0.7: About 2.7 ㏀) | About 2.7 ㏀ (%IX0.0.0 ~%IX0.0.7: About 1.8 ㏀) |
|||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1/3/5/10/20/70/100 ㎳ (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3 ㎳ | |||
| On → Off | |||||
| Insulation pressure | AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m) | ||||
| Insulation resistance | 10 ㏁ or more by Mega ohmmeter | ||||
| Common method | 16 point / COM | ||||
| Proper cable size | 0.3 ㎟ | ||||
| Current consumption | 200 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Input On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 42 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw) | ||||
| Weight | 800g | 900g | |||
| Circuit configuration | No. | contact | No. | con tact | type |
| TB1 | RX | ||||
| TB2 | 485+ | ||||
| TB3 | TX | ||||
| TB4 | 485- | ||||
| TB5 | SG | ||||
| TB6 | 00 | ||||
| TB7 | 01 | ||||
| TB8 | 02 | ||||
| TB9 | 03 | ||||
| TB10 | 04 | ||||
| TB11 | 05 | ||||
| TB12 | 06 | ||||
| TB13 | 07 | ||||
| TB14 | 08 | ||||
| TB15 | 09 | ||||
| TB16 | 10 | ||||
| TB17 | 11 | ||||
| TB18 | 12 | ||||
| TB19 | 13 | ||||
| TB20 | 14 | ||||
| TB21 | 15 | ||||
| TB22 | COM | ||||
| TB23 | NC | ||||
| TB24 | 16 | ||||
| TB25 | 17 | ||||
| TB26 | 18 | ||||
| TB27 | 19 | ||||
| TB28 | 20 | ||||
| TB29 | 21 | ||||
| TB30 | 22 | ||||
| TB31 | 23 | ||||
| TB32 | 24 | ||||
| TB33 | 25 | ||||
| TB34 | 26 | ||||
| TB35 | 27 | ||||
| TB36 | 28 | ||||
| TB37 | 29 | ||||
| TB38 | 30 | ||||
| TB39 | 31 | ||||
| TB40 | COM | ||||
| TB41 | 24 |
| DC24V 0F 00 TB6 TB21 TB22 DC24V 1F 10 TB24 TB39 TB40 |
R COM0 Photo coupler R COM1 Photo coupler |
| Terminal block no. |
Internal
circuit
R
R
7-8
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| TB42 | 24V |
| G |
| 7.3 Digital Output Specification of Main Unit |
7.3.1 XEC-DR32H output unit
| Model Specification |
Main unit | ||||
| XEC-DR32H | |||||
| Output point | 16 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Relay insulation | ||||
| Rated load voltage/current |
DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COSΦ = 1), 5A/COM | ||||
| Min. load voltage/current |
DC5V / 1 ㎃ | ||||
| Max. load voltage | AC250V, DC125V | ||||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ (AC220V, 60 ㎐) | ||||
| Max. on/off frequency | 3,600 times / hour | ||||
| Surge killer | None | ||||
| Life | Mechanical | 20 million or above | |||
| Electrical | Rated load voltage / current one hundred thousand or above | ||||
| AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COSΦ = 0.7) one hundred thousand or above | |||||
| AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COSΦ = 0.35) one hundred thousand or above | |||||
| DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ㎳) one hundred thousand or above | |||||
| Response time |
Off → On | 10 ㎳ or less | |||
| On → Off | 12 ㎳ or less | ||||
| Common method | 4 point / COM | ||||
| Proper cable size | Strand wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||||
| Internal consumption current |
360 ㎃ (When all output are on) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 24 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw) | ||||
| Weight | 600g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | contact | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | AC100 ~ 240V |
||||
| TB2 | PE | ||||
| TB3 | |||||
| TB4 | NC | ||||
| TB5 | 00 | ||||
| TB6 | 01 | ||||
| TB7 | 02 | ||||
| TB8 | 03 | ||||
| TB9 | COM0 | ||||
| TB10 | 04 | ||||
| TB11 | 05 | ||||
| TB12 | 06 | ||||
| TB13 | 07 | ||||
| TB14 | COM1 | ||||
| TB15 | 08 | ||||
| TB16 | 09 | ||||
| TB17 | 10 | ||||
| TB18 | 11 | ||||
| TB19 | COM2 | ||||
| TB20 | 12 | ||||
| TB21 | 13 | ||||
| TB22 | 14 | ||||
| TB23 | 15 |
I
| RY RY RY RY COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 |
| TB5 TB10 TB15 TB20 |
NTERNA
l
CIRCUIT
TB9
TB8
TB14
TB13
TB19
TB18
Terminal block no.
TB24
TB23
7-9
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| TB24 | COM3 |
7.3.2 XEC-DR64H output unit
| Model Specification |
Main unit | ||||
| XEC-DR64H | |||||
| Output point | 32 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Relay insulation | ||||
| Rated load voltage/current |
DC24V 2A (resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COSΦ = 1), 5A/COM | ||||
| Min. load voltage/current |
DC5V / 1 ㎃ | ||||
| Max. load voltage | AC250V, DC125V | ||||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ (AC220V, 60 ㎐) | ||||
| Max. on/off frequency | 3,600 times / hour | ||||
| Surge killer | None | ||||
| Life | Mechanical | 20 million or above | |||
| Electrical | Rated load voltage / current one hundred thousand or above | ||||
| AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COSΦ = 0.7) one hundred thousand or above | |||||
| AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COSΦ = 0.35) one hundred thousand or above | |||||
| DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ㎳) one hundred thousand or above | |||||
| Response time |
Off → On | 10 ㎳ or less | |||
| On → Off | 12 ㎳ or less | ||||
| Common method | 4 point / COM (COM0~COM3), 8 point / COM (COM4~COM5) | ||||
| Proper cable size | Strand wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||||
| Internal consumption current |
720 ㎃ (When all output are on) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 42 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw) | ||||
| Weight | 900g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | No. | Contact | type |
| TB1 | AC100 ~240V |
||||
| TB2 | PE | ||||
| TB3 | |||||
| TB4 | NC | ||||
| TB5 | 00 | ||||
| TB6 | 01 | ||||
| TB7 | 02 | ||||
| TB8 | 03 | ||||
| TB9 | COM0 | ||||
| TB10 | 04 | ||||
| TB11 | 05 | ||||
| TB12 | 06 | ||||
| TB13 | 07 | ||||
| TB14 | COM1 | ||||
| TB15 | 08 | ||||
| TB16 | 09 | ||||
| TB17 | 10 | ||||
| TB18 | 11 | ||||
| TB1 9 |
COM2 | ||||
| TB20 | 12 | ||||
| TB21 | 13 | ||||
| TB22 | 14 | ||||
| TB23 | 15 | ||||
| TB24 | COM3 | ||||
| TB25 | 16 | ||||
| TB26 | 17 | ||||
| TB27 | 18 | ||||
| TB28 | 19 | ||||
| TB29 | 20 | ||||
| TB30 | 21 | ||||
| TB31 | 22 | ||||
| TB32 | 23 | ||||
| TB3 3 |
COM4 | ||||
| TB34 | 24 | ||||
| TB35 | 25 | ||||
| TB36 | 26 | ||||
| TB37 | 27 | ||||
| TB38 | 28 | ||||
| TB39 | 29 | ||||
| TB40 | 30 | ||||
| TB41 | 31 | ||||
| TB42 | COM5 |
I RY
NTERNA
l
CIRCUIT
TB5
TB9
TB8
RY
TB10
TB14
TB13
RY
TB15
TB19
TB18
RY
TB20
TB24
TB23
COM0
COM1
COM2
COM3
RY
TB25
TB33
TB32
RY
Terminal block no.
TB34
TB42
TB41
COM4
COM5
7-10
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.3.3 XEC-DN32H output unit (Sink type)
| Model Specification |
Main unit | ||||
| XEC-DN32H(/DC) | |||||
| Output point | 16 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated load voltage | DC 12 / 24V | ||||
| Range of load voltage | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||||
| Max. load current | General output : 0.5A / 1 point Output for positioning (%QX0.0.0~%QX0.0.3), 0.1A/1 point, 2A / 1COM |
||||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||||
| On max. voltage drop | DC 0.4V or less | ||||
| Surge killer | Zener diode | ||||
| Response time | Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |||
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load) | ||||
| Common method | 4 point / COM | ||||
| Proper cable size | Strand wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (external diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||||
| Internal consumption current |
400 ㎃ (When all output are on) | ||||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |||
| Current | 25 ㎃ or less (When connecting DC24V) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 24 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw) | ||||
| Weight | 500g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | AC100 ~240V |
||||
| TB2 | PE | ||||
| TB3 | |||||
| TB4 | P | ||||
| TB5 | 00 | ||||
| TB6 | 01 | ||||
| TB7 | 02 | ||||
| TB8 | 03 | ||||
| TB9 | COM0 | ||||
| TB10 | 04 | ||||
| TB11 | 05 | ||||
| TB12 | 06 | ||||
| TB13 | 07 | ||||
| TB14 | COM1 | ||||
| TB15 | 08 | ||||
| TB16 | 09 | ||||
| TB17 | 10 | ||||
| TB18 | 11 | ||||
| TB19 | COM2 | ||||
| TB20 | 12 | ||||
| TB21 | 13 | ||||
| TB22 | 14 | ||||
| TB23 | 15 | ||||
| TB24 | COM3 |
INTERNA
l
CIRCUIT
Terminal block no.
TB04
DC12/24V
R
TB05
TB08
TB09
DC12/24V
R
TB10
TB13
TB14
DC12/24V
R
TB15
TB18
TB19
DC12/24V
R
TB20
TB23
TB24
DC5V
7-11
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7-12
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.3.4 XEC-DP32H output unit (Source type)
| Model Specification |
Main unit | ||||
| XEC-DP32H | |||||
| Output point | 16 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated load voltage | DC 12 / 24V | ||||
| Range of load voltage | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||||
| Max. load current | General output: 0.5A/1 point, Output for positioning (%QX0.0.0 ~ %QX0.0.3): 0.1A/1point, 2A/1COM |
||||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||||
| On max. voltage drop | DC 0.4V or less | ||||
| Surge killer | Zenner diode | ||||
| Response time | Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |||
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load) | ||||
| Common method | 4 point / COM | ||||
| Proper cable size | Strand wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (external diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||||
| Internal consumption current |
410 ㎃ (When all output are on) | ||||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |||
| Current | 25 ㎃ or less (When connecting DC24V) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 24 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw) | ||||
| Weight | 500g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | AC100 ~240V |
||||
| TB2 | PE | ||||
| TB3 | |||||
| TB4 | N | ||||
| TB5 | 00 | ||||
| TB6 | 01 | ||||
| TB7 | 02 | ||||
| TB8 | 03 | ||||
| TB9 | COM 0 |
||||
| TB10 | 04 | ||||
| TB11 | 05 | ||||
| TB12 | 06 | ||||
| TB13 | 07 | ||||
| TB14 | COM1 | ||||
| TB15 | 08 | ||||
| TB16 | 09 | ||||
| TB17 | 10 | ||||
| TB18 | 11 | ||||
| TB19 | COM 2 |
||||
| TB20 | 12 | ||||
| TB21 | 13 | ||||
| TB22 | 14 | ||||
| TB23 | 15 | ||||
| TB24 | COM3 |
내 부 회 로
TB04
DC12/24V
R
TB08
TB09
DC12/24V
R
TB10
TB13
TB14
DC12/24V
R
TB15
TB18
TB19
DC12/24V
R
TB20
TB23
TB24
DC5V TB05
7-13
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.3.5 XEC-DN64H output unit (Sink type)
| Model Specification |
Main unit | ||||
| XEC-DN64H | |||||
| Output point | 32 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated load voltage |
DC 12 / 24V | ||||
| Load voltage range | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||||
| Max. load current | General output : 0.5A / 1 point Output for positioning (%QX0.0.0~%QX0.0.3), 0.1A/1 point, 2A / 1COM |
||||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||||
| On max. voltage drop | DC 0.4V or less | ||||
| Surge killer | Zener diode | ||||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |||
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, Resistive load) | ||||
| Common method | 4 point / COM (COM0~COM3), 8 point / COM (COM4~COM5) | ||||
| Proper cable size | Strand wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (external diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||||
| Internal consumption current |
500 ㎃ (When all output are on) | ||||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (Ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |||
| Current | 25 ㎃ or less (when connecting DC24V) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 42 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw) | ||||
| Weight | 800g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | contact | No. | contact | Type |
| TB1 | AC100 ~240V |
||||
| TB2 | PE | ||||
| TB3 | |||||
| TB4 | P | ||||
| TB5 | 00 | ||||
| TB6 | 01 | ||||
| TB7 | 02 | ||||
| TB8 | 03 | ||||
| TB9 | COM0 | ||||
| TB10 | 04 | ||||
| TB11 | 05 | ||||
| TB12 | 06 | ||||
| TB13 | 07 | ||||
| TB14 | COM1 | ||||
| TB15 | 08 | ||||
| TB16 | 09 | ||||
| TB17 | 10 | ||||
| TB18 | 11 | ||||
| TB19 | COM2 | ||||
| TB20 | 12 | ||||
| TB21 | 13 | ||||
| TB22 | 14 | ||||
| TB23 | 15 | ||||
| TB24 | COM3 | ||||
| TB25 | 16 | ||||
| TB26 | 17 | ||||
| TB27 | 18 | ||||
| TB28 | 19 | ||||
| TB29 | 20 | ||||
| TB30 | 21 | ||||
| TB31 | 22 | ||||
| TB32 | 23 | ||||
| TB33 | COM4 | ||||
| TB34 | 24 | ||||
| TB35 | 25 | ||||
| TB36 | 26 | ||||
| TB37 | 27 | ||||
| TB38 | 28 | ||||
| TB39 | 29 | ||||
| TB40 | 30 | ||||
| TB41 | 31 | ||||
| TB42 | COM5 |
INTERNA
l
CIRCUIT
| Terminal block no. |
TB04
DC12/24V
R
TB05
TB08
TB09
DC12/24V
R
TB10
TB13
TB14
DC12/24V
R
TB15
TB18
TB19
DC12/24V
R
TB20
TB23
TB24
DC5V
DC12/24V
R
TB25
TB32
TB33
DC12/24V
R
TB34
TB41
TB42
7-14
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.3.6 XEC-DP64H Output unit (Source type)
| Model Specification |
Main unit | ||||
| XEC-DP64H | |||||
| Output point | 32 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated load voltage |
DC 12 / 24V | ||||
| Load voltage range | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||||
| Max. load current | General output: 0.5A/1 point, Output for positioning (%QX0.0.0 ~ %QX0.0.3): 0.1A/1 point, 2A/1COM |
||||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||||
| On max. voltage drop | DC 0.4V or less | ||||
| Surge killer | Zener diode | ||||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |||
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, Resistive load) | ||||
| Common method | 4 point / COM (COM0~COM3), 8 point / COM (COM4~COM5) | ||||
| Proper cable size | Strand wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (external diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||||
| Internal consumption current |
510 ㎃ (When all output are on) | ||||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (Ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |||
| Current | 25 ㎃ or less (when connecting DC24V) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 42 point connecting connector (M3 X 6 screw) | ||||
| Weight | 800g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | contact | No. | contact | Type |
| TB1 | AC100 ~240V |
||||
| TB2 | PE | ||||
| TB3 | |||||
| TB4 | N | ||||
| TB5 | 00 | ||||
| TB6 | 01 | ||||
| TB7 | 02 | ||||
| TB8 | 03 | ||||
| TB9 | COM 0 |
||||
| TB10 | 04 | ||||
| TB11 | 05 | ||||
| TB12 | 06 | ||||
| TB13 | 07 | ||||
| TB14 | COM1 | ||||
| TB15 | 08 | ||||
| TB16 | 09 | ||||
| TB17 | 10 | ||||
| TB18 | 11 | ||||
| TB19 | COM 2 |
||||
| TB20 | 12 | ||||
| TB21 | 13 | ||||
| TB22 | 14 | ||||
| TB23 | 15 | ||||
| TB24 | COM3 | ||||
| TB25 | 16 | ||||
| TB26 | 17 | ||||
| TB27 | 18 | ||||
| TB28 | 19 | ||||
| TB29 | 20 | ||||
| TB30 | 21 | ||||
| TB31 | 22 | ||||
| TB32 | 23 | ||||
| TB33 | COM 4 |
||||
| TB34 | 24 | ||||
| TB35 | 25 | ||||
| TB36 | 26 | ||||
| TB37 | 27 | ||||
| TB38 | 28 | ||||
| TB39 | 29 | ||||
| TB40 | 30 | ||||
| TB41 | 31 | ||||
| TB42 | COM5 |
TB04
DC12/24V
R
TB08
DC12/24V
R TB13
TB14
DC12/24V
R
TB15
TB18
TB19
DC12/24V
R
TB20
TB23
TB24
DC5V
DC12/24V
R
TB25
TB32
TB33
DC12/24V
R
TB34
TB41
TB42
TB09
TB10
내 부 회 로
TB05
7-15
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| 7.4 Digital Input Module Specification |
7.4.1 8 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type)
| Model Specification |
DC input module | ||
| XBE-DC08A | |||
| Input point | 8 point | ||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||
| Rated input voltage | DC24V | ||
| Rated input current | About 4 ㎃ | ||
| Operation voltage range | DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%) | ||
| On Voltage/Current | DC19V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher | ||
| Off Voltage/Current | DC6V or less / 1 ㎃ or less | ||
| Input resistance | About 5.6 ㏀ | ||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1/3/5/10/20/70/100 ㎳(set by CPU parameter) Default: 3 ㎳ | |
| On → Off | |||
| Insulation pressure | AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m) | ||
| Insulation resistance | 10 ㏁ or more by Mega ohmmeter | ||
| Common method | 8 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable size | Stranded pair 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 30 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| Operation indicator | Input On, LED On | ||
| External connection method |
9 point terminal block connector | ||
| Weight | 52 g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | 0 | ||
| TB2 | 1 | ||
| TB3 | 2 | ||
| TB4 | 3 | ||
| TB5 | 4 | ||
| TB6 | 5 | ||
| TB7 | 6 | ||
| TB8 | 7 | ||
| TB9 | COM |
| DC24V 0 7 Terminal block no. |
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 |
Internal
circuit
R
TB1
COM
Photo coupler
TB8
TB9
R
7-16
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.4.2 16 point DC24V input module (Sink/Source type)
| Model Specification |
DC input module | ||
| XBE-DC16A | XBE-DC16B | ||
| Input point | 16 point | ||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||
| Rated input voltage | DC24V | DC 12/24V | |
| Rated input current | About 4 ㎃ | About 4/8mA | |
| Operation voltage range | DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%) |
DC 9.5V~30V (ripple rate< 5%) |
|
| On Voltage/Current | DC19V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher |
DC9V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher | |
| Off Voltage/Current | DC6V or less / 1 ㎃ or less | DC5V or less / 1 ㎃ or less | |
| Input resistance | About 5.6 ㏀ | About 2.7 ㏀ | |
| Response time |
Off → On | 1/3/5/10/20/70/100 ㎳ (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3 ㎳ | |
| On → Off | |||
| Insulation pressure | AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m) | ||
| Insulation resistance | 10 ㏁ or more by Mega ohmmeter | ||
| Common method | 16 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable size | Stranded cable 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 40 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| Operation indicator | Input On, LED On | ||
| External connection method | 8 pin terminal block connector + 10 pin terminal block connector | ||
| Weight | 53 g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | 0 | ||
| TB2 | 1 | ||
| TB3 | 2 | ||
| TB4 | 3 | ||
| TB5 | 4 | ||
| TB6 | 5 | ||
| TB7 | 6 | ||
| TB8 | 7 | ||
| TB1 | 8 | ||
| TB2 | 9 | ||
| TB3 | A | ||
| TB4 | B | ||
| TB5 | C | ||
| TB6 | D | ||
| TB7 | E | ||
| TB8 | F | ||
| TB9 | COM | ||
| TB10 | COM |
| DC24V 0 F Terminal block no. |
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 TB10 |
Internal
circuit
R
TB1
COM
Photo coupler
TB8
TB9
R
7-17
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.4.3 32 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type)
| Model Specification |
DC input module | ||||
| XBE-DC32A | |||||
| Input point | 32 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated input voltage | DC24V | ||||
| Rated input current | About 4 ㎃ | ||||
| Operation voltage range | DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%) | ||||
| Input Derating | Refer to Derating diagram | ||||
| On Voltage/Current | DC 19V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher | ||||
| Off Voltage/Current | DC 6V or less / 1 ㎃ or less | ||||
| Input resistance | About 5.6 ㏀ | ||||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1/3/5/10/20/70/100 ㎳ (set by CPU parameter) Default:3 ㎳ | |||
| On → Off | |||||
| Insulation pressure | AC 560Vrms / 3 Cycle (altitude 2000m) | ||||
| Insulation resistance | 10 ㏁ or more by Mega ohmmeter | ||||
| Common method | 32 point / COM | ||||
| Proper cable size | 0.3 ㎟ | ||||
| Current consumption | 50 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Input On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 40 pin connector | ||||
| Weight | 60g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | No. | Contact | Type |
| B20 | 00 | A20 | 10 | ||
| B19 | 01 | A19 | 11 | ||
| B18 | 02 | A18 | 12 | ||
| B17 | 03 | A17 | 13 | ||
| B16 | 04 | A16 | 14 | ||
| B15 | 05 | A15 | 15 | ||
| B14 | 06 | A14 | 16 | ||
| B13 | 07 | A13 | 17 | ||
| B12 | 08 | A12 | 18 | ||
| B11 | 09 | A11 | 19 | ||
| B10 | 0A | A10 | 1A | ||
| B09 | 0B | A09 | 1B | ||
| B08 | 0C | A08 | 1C | ||
| B07 | 0D | A07 | 1D | ||
| B06 | 0E | A06 | 1E | ||
| B05 | 0F | A05 | 1F | ||
| B04 | NC | A04 | NC | ||
| B03 | NC | A03 | NC | ||
| B02 | COM | A02 | COM | ||
| B01 | COM | A01 | COM |
| DC28.8V DC24V Terminal block no. 100 80 60 40 0 10 20 30 40 50 55 ℃ On rate (%) Ambient temperature (℃ ) 90 70 50 Input Derating diagram |
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 |
Internal
circuit
R
1F
0
B20
COM
Photo coupler
B03
B02
R
7-18
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| 7.5 Digital Output Module Specification |
7.5.1 8 point relay output module
| Model Specification |
Relay output module | ||
| XBE-RY08A | |||
| Output point | 8 point | ||
| Insulation method | Relay insulation | ||
| Rated load voltage / Current | DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COSΨ = 1), 5A/COM | ||
| Min. load voltage/Current | DC5V / 1 ㎃ | ||
| Max. load voltage/Current | AC250V, DC125V | ||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ (AC220V, 60 ㎐) | ||
| Max. On/Off frequency | 3,600 times/hr | ||
| Surge absorber | None | ||
| Service life | Mechanical | 20 millions times or more | |
| Electrical | Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more | ||
| AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COSΨ = 0.7) 100,000 times or more | |||
| AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COSΨ = 0.35) 100,000 times or more | |||
| DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ㎳) 100,000 times or more | |||
| Response time |
Off → On | 10 ㎳ or less | |
| On → Off | 12 ㎳ or less | ||
| Common method | 8 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable size | Twisted pair0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 230 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||
| External connection method | 9 point terminal block connector | ||
| Weight | 80g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | 0 | ||
| TB2 | 1 | ||
| TB3 | 2 | ||
| TB4 | 3 | ||
| TB5 | 4 | ||
| TB6 | 5 | ||
| TB7 | 6 | ||
| TB8 | 7 | ||
| TB9 | COM |
| TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 |
Terminal block no. |
DC5V
Internal RY
circuit
TB1
TB9
TB8
7-19
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.5.2 16 point relay output module
| Model Specification |
Relay output module | ||
| XBE-RY16A | |||
| Output point | 16 point | ||
| Insulation method | Relay insulation | ||
| Rated load voltage/ current | DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COSΨ = 1), 5A/COM | ||
| Min. load voltage/current | DC5V / 1 ㎃ | ||
| Max. load voltage/current | AC250V, DC125V | ||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ (AC220V, 60 ㎐) | ||
| Max. On/Off frequency | 3,600 times/hr | ||
| Surge absorber | None | ||
| Service life |
Mechanical | 20 millions times or more | |
| Electrical | Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more | ||
| AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COSΨ = 0.7) 100,000 times or more | |||
| AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COSΨ = 0.35) 100,000 times or more | |||
| DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ㎳) 100,000 times or more | |||
| Response time |
Off → On | 10 ㎳ or less | |
| On → Off | 12 ㎳ or less | ||
| Common method | 8 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable size | Twisted pair0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 420 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||
| External connection method | 9 point terminal block connector x 2 ea | ||
| Weight | 130g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | 0 | ||
| TB2 | 1 | ||
| TB3 | 2 | ||
| TB4 | 3 | ||
| TB5 | 4 | ||
| TB6 | 5 | ||
| TB7 | 6 | ||
| TB8 | 7 | ||
| TB9 | COM | ||
| TB1 | 8 | ||
| TB2 | 9 | ||
| TB3 | A | ||
| TB4 | B | ||
| TB5 | C | ||
| TB6 | D | ||
| TB7 | E | ||
| TB8 | F | ||
| TB9 | COM |
Internal RY
circuit
| Terminal block no. | TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 |
TB1
TB9
TB8
DC5V
7-20
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.5.3 8 point transistor output module (Sink type)
| Model Specification |
Transistor output module | ||
| XBE-TN08A | |||
| Output point | 8 point | ||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||
| Rated load voltage | DC 12 / 24V | ||
| Load voltage range | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||
| Max. load voltage | 0.5A / 1 point | ||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||
| Max. voltage drop (On) | DC 0.4V or less | ||
| Surge absorber | Zener Diode | ||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load) | ||
| Common method | 8 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable size | Stranded pair 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 40 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |
| Current | 10 ㎃ or less (DC24V connection) | ||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||
| External connection method |
10 point terminal block connector | ||
| Weight | 53 | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB01 | 0 | ||
| TB02 | 1 | ||
| TB03 | 2 | ||
| TB04 | 3 | ||
| TB05 | 4 | ||
| TB06 | 5 | ||
| TB07 | 6 | ||
| TB08 | 7 | ||
| TB09 | DC12 /24V |
||
| TB10 | COM |
| TB01 TB02 TB03 TB04 TB05 TB06 TB07 TB08 TB09 TB10 |
TB01 |
| Terminal block no. DC12/24V |
|
| R |
Internal
circuit
TB09
TB08
TB10
DC5V
7-21
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.5.4 16 point transistor output module (Sink type)
| Model Specification |
Transistor output module | ||
| XBE-TN16A | |||
| Output point | 16 point | ||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||
| Rated load voltage | DC 12 / 24V | ||
| Load voltage range | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||
| Max. load voltage | 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM | ||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||
| Max. voltage drop (On) | DC 0.4V or less | ||
| Surge absorber | Zener Diode | ||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load) | ||
| Common method | 16 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable size | Stranded pair 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 60 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |
| Current | 10 ㎃ or less (DC24V connection) | ||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||
| External connection method | 8 pin terminal block connector + 10 pin terminal block connector | ||
| Weight | 54 g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB01 | 0 | ||
| TB02 | 1 | ||
| TB03 | 2 | ||
| TB04 | 3 | ||
| TB05 | 4 | ||
| TB06 | 5 | ||
| TB07 | 6 | ||
| TB08 | 7 | ||
| TB01 | 8 | ||
| TB02 | 9 | ||
| TB03 | A | ||
| TB04 | B | ||
| TB05 | C | ||
| TB06 | D | ||
| TB07 | E | ||
| TB08 | F | ||
| TB09 | DC12 /24V |
||
| TB10 | COM |
| Terminal block no. | TB01 TB02 TB03 TB04 TB05 TB06 TB07 TB08 TB09 TB10 TB01 TB02 TB03 TB04 TB05 TB06 TB07 TB08 |
DC12/24V
R
Internal
circuit
TB10
TB09
TB08
TB10
DC5V
7-22
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.5.5 32 point transistor output module (Sink type)
| Model Specification |
Transistor output module | ||||
| XBE-TN32A | |||||
| Output point | 32 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated load voltage | DC 12 / 24V | ||||
| Load voltage range | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||||
| Max. load voltage | 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM | ||||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||||
| Max. inrush current | 0.7A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||||
| Max. voltage drop (On) | DC 0.4V or less | ||||
| Surge absorber | Zener Diode | ||||
| Response time | Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |||
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load) | ||||
| Common method | 32 point / COM | ||||
| Proper cable size | 0.3 ㎟ | ||||
| Current consumption | 120 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |||
| Current | 20 ㎃ or less (DC24V connection) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 40 pin connector | ||||
| Weight | 60g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | No. | Contact | Type |
| B20 | 00 | A20 | 10 | ||
| B19 | 01 | A19 | 11 | ||
| B18 | 02 | A18 | 12 | ||
| B17 | 03 | A17 | 13 | ||
| B16 | 04 | A16 | 14 | ||
| B15 | 05 | A15 | 15 | ||
| B14 | 06 | A14 | 16 | ||
| B13 | 07 | A13 | 17 | ||
| B12 | 08 | A12 | 18 | ||
| B11 | 09 | A11 | 19 | ||
| B10 | 0A | A10 | 1A | ||
| B09 | 0B | A09 | 1B | ||
| B08 | 0C | A08 | 1C | ||
| B07 | 0D | A07 | 1D | ||
| B06 | 0E | A06 | 1E | ||
| B05 | 0F | A05 | 1F | ||
| B04 | NC | A04 | NC | ||
| B03 | NC | A03 | NC | ||
| B02 | DC12/ 24V |
A02 | COM | ||
| B01 | A01 |
| B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 |
Terminal block no. |
DC12/24V
R
Internal
circuit
B20
B01,B02
A05
A01,A02
DC5V
7-23
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.5.6 8 point transistor output module (Source type)
| Model Specification |
Transistor output module | ||
| XBE-TP08A | |||
| Output point | 8 point | ||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||
| Rated load voltage | DC 12 / 24V | ||
| Load voltage range | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||
| Max. load voltage | 0.5A / 1 point | ||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||
| Max. voltage drop (On) | DC 0.4V or less | ||
| Surge absorber | Zener Diode | ||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load) | ||
| Common method | 8 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable size | Stranded wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (external diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 40 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |
| Current | 10 ㎃ or less (DC24V connection) | ||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||
| External connection method |
10 pin connector | ||
| Weight | 30g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB01 | 0 | ||
| TB02 | 1 | ||
| TB03 | 2 | ||
| TB04 | 3 | ||
| TB05 | 4 | ||
| TB06 | 5 | ||
| TB07 | 6 | ||
| TB08 | 7 | ||
| TB09 | COM | ||
| TB10 | 0V |
| TB01 TB02 TB03 TB04 TB05 TB06 TB07 TB08 TB09 TB10 |
Terminal block no. |
DC5V
R
Internal
circuit
TB09
TB10
TB01
TB08
7-24
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.5.7 16 point transistor output module (Source type)
| Model Specification |
Transistor output module | ||
| XBE-TP16A | |||
| Output point | 16 point | ||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||
| Rated load voltage | DC 12 / 24V | ||
| Load voltage range | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||
| Max. load voltage | 0.5A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM | ||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||
| Max. voltage drop (On) | DC 0.4V or less | ||
| Surge absorber | Zener Diode | ||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load) | ||
| Common method | 16 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable size | Stranded wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (external diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 60 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |
| Current | 10 ㎃ or less (DC24V connection) | ||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||
| External connection method | 8 pin connector + 10 pin connector | ||
| Weight | 40g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB01 | 0 | ||
| TB02 | 1 | ||
| TB03 | 2 | ||
| TB04 | 3 | ||
| TB05 | 4 | ||
| TB06 | 5 | ||
| TB07 | 6 | ||
| TB08 | 7 | ||
| TB01 | 8 | ||
| TB02 | 9 | ||
| TB03 | A | ||
| TB04 | B | ||
| TB05 | C | ||
| TB06 | D | ||
| TB07 | E | ||
| TB08 | F | ||
| TB09 | COM | ||
| TB10 | 0V |
DC5V
DC12/24V
R
Internal
circuit
Terminal block n
| o. | TB01 TB02 TB03 TB04 TB05 TB06 TB07 TB08 TB09 TB10 TB01 TB02 TB03 TB04 TB05 TB06 TB07 TB08 |
TB09
TB10
TB01
TB08
7-25
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
7.5.8 32 point transistor output module (Source type)
| Model Specification |
Transistor output module | ||||
| XBE-TP32A | |||||
| Output point | 32 point | ||||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||||
| Rated load voltage | DC 12 / 24V | ||||
| Load voltage range | DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V | ||||
| Max. load voltage | 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM | ||||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ or less | ||||
| Max. inrush current | 4A / 10 ㎳ or less | ||||
| Max. voltage drop (On) | DC 0.4V or less | ||||
| Surge absorber | Zener diode | ||||
| Response time | Off → On | 1 ㎳ or less | |||
| On → Off | 1 ㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load) | ||||
| Common method | 32 point / COM | ||||
| Proper cable size | 0.3 ㎟ | ||||
| Current consumption | 120 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||||
| External power supply |
Voltage | DC12/24V ± 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less) | |||
| Current | 20 ㎃ or less (DC24V connection) | ||||
| Operation indicator | Output On, LED On | ||||
| External connection method | 40 pin connector | ||||
| Weight | 60g | ||||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | No. | Contact | Type |
| B20 | 00 | A20 | 10 | ||
| B19 | 01 | A19 | 11 | ||
| B18 | 02 | A18 | 12 | ||
| B17 | 03 | A17 | 13 | ||
| B16 | 04 | A16 | 14 | ||
| B15 | 05 | A15 | 15 | ||
| B14 | 06 | A14 | 16 | ||
| B13 | 07 | A13 | 17 | ||
| B12 | 08 | A12 | 18 | ||
| B11 | 09 | A11 | 19 | ||
| B10 | 0A | A10 | 1A | ||
| B09 | 0B | A09 | 1B | ||
| B08 | 0C | A08 | 1C | ||
| B07 | 0D | A07 | 1D | ||
| B06 | 0E | A06 | 1E | ||
| B05 | 0F | A05 | 1F | ||
| B04 | NC | A04 | NC | ||
| B03 | NC | A03 | NC | ||
| B02 | COM | A02 | 0V | ||
| B01 | A01 |
| B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 |
DC5V
DC12/24V
R
Internal
circuit
Connector no.
B02,B01
A02,A01
B20
A05
7-26
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| 7.6 Combined Module Digital Input Specification |
7.6.1 8 point DC24V input part (Source/Sink type)
| Model Specification |
DC input module | ||
| XBE-DR16A | |||
| Input Point | 8 point | ||
| Insulation method | Photo coupler insulation | ||
| Rated input voltage | DC24V | ||
| Rated input current | About 4 ㎃ | ||
| Used voltage range | DC20.4~28.8V (Within ripple rate 5%) | ||
| On voltage / On current | DC19V or above / 3 ㎃ or above | ||
| Off voltage / Off current | DC6V or above / 1 ㎃ or above | ||
| Input resistor | About 5.6 ㏀ | ||
| Response time |
Off → On | 1/3/5/10/20/70/100 ㎳(Set by CPU parameter) initial value: 3 ㎳ | |
| On → Off | |||
| Insulation internal pressure |
AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m) | ||
| Insulation resistor | 10 ㏁ or above by insulation resistor meter | ||
| Common method | 8 point / COM | ||
| Proper cable Size | Stranded wire0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Current consumption | 280 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| Operation indication | Output On, LED On | ||
| External connection method |
9 pin connector | ||
| Weight | 81g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | 0 | ||
| TB2 | 1 | ||
| TB3 | 2 | ||
| TB4 | 3 | ||
| TB5 | 4 | ||
| TB6 | 5 | ||
| TB7 | 6 | ||
| TB8 | 7 | ||
| TB9 | COM |
| DC24V 0 7 Terminal block no. |
TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 |
Internal
circuit
R
TB1
COM
Photo coupler
TB8
TB9
R
7-27
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| 7.7 Combined Module Digital Output Specification |
7.7.1 8 point relay output part
| Model Specification |
Relay output module | ||
| XBE-DR16A | |||
| Output point | 8 point | ||
| Insulation method | Relay insulation | ||
| Rated load voltage/current | DC24V 2A(resistive load 하) / AC220V 2A(COSΨ = 1), 5A/COM | ||
| Min. load voltage/current | DC5V / 1 ㎃ | ||
| Max. load voltage | AC250V, DC125V | ||
| Off leakage current | 0.1 ㎃ (AC220V, 60 ㎐) | ||
| Max. On off frequency | 3,600 times / hour | ||
| Surge absorber | None | ||
| Life time | Mechanical | 200 million or above | |
| Electrical | Rated load voltage / current 1 million or above | ||
| AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COSΨ = 0.7) 1 million or above | |||
| AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COSΨ = 0.35) 1 million or above | |||
| DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7 ㎳) 1 million or above | |||
| Response time |
Off → On | 10 ㎳ or less | |
| On → Off | 12 ㎳ or less | ||
| Common method | 8 점 / COM | ||
| Proper cable Size | Stranded wire 0.3~0.75 ㎟ (External diameter 2.8 ㎜ or less) | ||
| Consumption current | 280 ㎃ (when all point On) | ||
| Operation indication | Output On, LED On | ||
| External connection method |
9 pin connector | ||
| Weight | 81g | ||
| Circuit configuration | No. | Contact | Type |
| TB1 | 0 | ||
| TB2 | 1 | ||
| TB3 | 2 | ||
| TB4 | 3 | ||
| TB5 | 4 | ||
| TB6 | 5 | ||
| TB7 | 6 | ||
| TB8 | 7 | ||
| TB9 | COM |
| TB1 TB2 TB3 TB4 TB5 TB6 TB7 TB8 TB9 |
Terminal block no. |
DC5V
Internal RY
circuit
TB1
TB9
TB8
7-28
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
| 7.8 IO Wiring by Using Smart Link Board |
7.8.1 Smart link board
Easy wiring is available by connecting the IO connector with smart link board.
The available smart link and IO cable are as follows.
| XGB | Smart link | Connection cable | ||||
| Classification | Model | Model | The no. of pin |
Model | Length | Content |
| Extension module |
XBE-DC32A | SLP-T40P | 40 | SLT-CT101-XBE | 1m | For extension module connection (40Pin) |
| XBE-TN32A | SLP-T40P | 40 | SLT-CT101-XBE | 1m | ||
| SLP-RY4A | 40 | SLP-CT101-XBE | 1m | For extension module connection (40Pin) Exclusive for relay built-in SLP type |
It describes wring of XGB, SLP-T40P and SLT-CT101-XBM.
For wring of other smart link boards or XGB extension module, refer to XGB user manual for hardware.
1) SLT-T40P terminal array
Terminal array of SLP-T40P is as follows.
| Item | Specification |
| Rated voltage | AC/DC 125[V] |
| Rated current | Max. 1[A] |
| Withstanding voltage |
600V 1min |
| Insulation resistor |
100 ㏁ (DC500V) |
| Cable specification |
1.25[㎟] or below |
| Terminal/screw | M3 X 8L |
| Torque | 6.2 ㎏f.㎝ or above |
| Terminal material |
PBT, UL94V-0 |
| Weight | 186g |
7-29
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
2) Wiring of SLT-T40P and XGB extension modulet
Wiring of XGB extension module through SLP-T40P and SLT-CT101-XBE is as follows.
At this time, relationship of XGB IO signal and Smart link board terminal number is as follows.
The following figure describes signal allocation when SLT-CT101-XBE is used as connection cable.
When the user makes the cable, make sure that wring is done as figure below.
Pin No.
Terminal block Name
Terminal block board
(SLP-T40P)
7-30
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
3) I/O wiring
- XBE-DC32A (SLP-T40P)
- XBE-TN32A (SLP-T40P)
- XBE-TP32A (SLP-T40P)
Contact No.
Contact No.
Contact No.
7-31
Chapter 7 Input/Output Specifications
- XBE-TN32A (SLP-RY4A)
7-32
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
XGB series have built-in function of High-speed counter in main unit. This chapter describes specifications
and usage of High-speed counter’s function.
| 8.1 High-speed Counter Specifications |
It describes specifications, setting and usage of function, programming and wiring with external
device of built-in main unit.
8.1.1 Performance specifications
(1) Performance specification
| Classification | Description | ||
| Count input signal |
Signal | A-phase, B-phase | |
| Input type | Voltage input (Open collector) | ||
| Signal level | DC 24V | ||
| Max. coefficient speed | 100kpps | ||
| Number of channels |
1 phase | 8 channels | 100kpps (ch0,1,2,3) / 20kpps (ch4,5,6,7) ※ 1 |
| 2 phase | 4 channels | 50kpps (ch0,2) / 10kpps (ch4,6) ※ 1 But, In case of 4 multiplication: 50kpps (ch0,2) / 8kpps (ch4,6) |
|
| Coefficient range | Signed 32 Bit (-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647) | ||
| Count mode (Program setting) |
Linear count (if 32-bit range exceeded, Carry/Borrow occurs) Counter max. and min. value is indicated |
||
| Ring count (repeated count within setting range) | |||
| Input mode (Program setting) |
1-phase input | ||
| 2-phase input | |||
| CW/CCW input | |||
| Signal type | Voltage | ||
| Up/Down setting |
1 phase input | Increasing/decreasing operation setting by B-phase input | |
| Increasing/decreasing operation setting by program | |||
| 2 phase input | Automatic setting by difference in phase | ||
| CW/CCW | A-phase input: increasing operation | ||
| B-phase input: decreasing operation | |||
| Multiplication function |
1 phase input | 1 multiplication | |
| 2 phase input | 4 multiplication | ||
| CW/CCW | 1 multiplication | ||
| Control input | Signal | Preset instruction input | |
| Signal level | DC 24V input type | ||
| Signal type | Voltage | ||
| External output | Output points | 1 point/channel (for each channel) :output contact point of main unit available |
2 point/channel (for each channel) :output contact point of main unit available |
| Type | Select single-compared (>, >=, =, =<, <) or section compared output (included or excluded) (program setting) |
||
| Output type | Relay, Open-collector output (Sink) | ||
| Count Enable | To be set through program (count available only in enable status) | ||
| Preset function | To be set through terminal (contact) or program | ||
| Auxiliary mode (program setting) | Latch counter, Count per unit time (time setting value: 1~60,000ms) |
8-1
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
※ 1 : XEC-DR32(64)H/D1 unit supports 1-phase 10kpps, 2-phase 5kpps.
(2) Counter/Preset input specification
| Classification | Spcification | |
| XEC-DR32H/DR64H XEC-DN32H(/DC)/DN64H XEC-DP32H/DP64H |
XEC-DR32H/D1 XEC-DR64H/D1 |
|
| Input voltage | 24V DC (20.4V ~ 28.8V) | 12V DC (9.5~30V) |
| Input current | 4㎃ | 4㎃ |
| On guranteed voltage (min.) | 20.4V | 9V |
| Off guranteed voltage (max.) | 6V | 5V |
8.1.2 Designation of parts
(1) Designation of parts
| Structure |
| Terminal No. |
Names | Usage | ||
| 1-phase | 2-phase | 1-phase | 2-phase | |
| IX0.0.0 | Ch0 counter input | Ch0 A-phase input | Counter input terminal | A-phase input |
| IX0.0.1 | Ch1 counter input | Ch0 B-phase input | Counter input terminal | B-phase input |
| IX0.0.2 | Ch2 counter input | Ch2 A-phase input | Counter input terminal | A-phase input |
| IX0.0.3 | Ch3 counter input | Ch2 B-phase input | Counter input terminal | B-phase input |
| IX0.0.4 | Ch4 counter input | Ch4 A-phase input | Counter input terminal | A-phase input |
| IX0.0.5 | Ch5 counter input | Ch4 B-phase input | Counter input terminal | B-phase input |
| IX0.0.6 | Ch6 counter input | Ch6 A-phase input | Counter input terminal | A-phase input |
| IX0.0.7 | Ch7 counter input | Ch6 B-phase input | Counter input terminal | B-phase input |
| IX0.0.8 | Ch0 preset 24V | Ch0 preset 24V | Preset input terminal | Preset input terminal |
| IX0.0.9 | Ch1 preset 24V | - | Preset input terminal | No use |
| IX0.0.10 | Ch2 preset 24V | Ch2 preset 24V | Preset input terminal | Preset input terminal |
| IX0.0.11 | Ch4 preset 24V | - | Preset input terminal | No use |
| IX0.0.12 | Ch5 preset 24V | Ch4 preset 24V | Preset input terminal | Preset input terminal |
| IX0.0.13 | Ch6 preset 24V | - | Preset input terminal | No use |
| IX0.0.14 | Ch7 preset 24V | Ch6 preset 24V | Preset input terminal | Preset input terminal |
| IX0.0.15 | Ch8 preset 24V | - | Preset input terminal | No use |
| COM0 | Input common | Input common | Input common | Input common |
8-2
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(2) Interface with external devices
The following table shows list of interface with external device.
| I/O | Internal circuit | Terminal No. |
Signal | Operation | On/Off guaranteed voltage※ 2 |
| 1-phase | 2-phase | ||||
| Input | IX0.0.0 | Ch 0 Pulse input |
Ch 0 A-phase input |
On | 20.4~28.8V |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.1 | Ch 1 Pulse input |
Ch 0 B-phase input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.2 | Ch 2 Pulse input |
Ch 2 A-phase input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.3 | Ch 3 Pulse input |
Ch 2 B-phase input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.4 | Ch 4 Pulse input |
Ch 4 A-phase input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.5 | Ch 5 Pulse input |
Ch 4 B-phase input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.6 | Ch 6 Pulse input |
Ch 6 A-phase input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.7 | Ch 7 Pulse input |
Ch 6 B-phase input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.8 | Ch 0 Preset input |
Ch 0 Preset input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.9 | Ch 1 Preset input |
- | On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.10 | Ch 2 Preset input |
Ch 2 Preset input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.11 | Ch 3 Preset input |
- | On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.12 | Ch 4 Preset input |
Ch 4 Preset input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.13 | Ch 5 Preset input |
- | On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.14 | Ch 6 Preset input |
Ch 6 Preset input |
On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| IX0.0.15 | Ch 7 Preset input |
- | On | 20.4~28.8V | |
| Off | 6V or less | ||||
| COM0 | COM (input common) |
※2 : on guaranteed voltage is 9V, off guaranteed voltage is 5V for XEC-DR32(64)H/D1 unit.
| 2.7 kΩ |
| 2.7 kΩ |
| 2.7 kΩ |
| 2.7 kΩ |
| 2.7 kΩ |
| 2.7 kΩ |
| 2.7 kΩ |
| 2.7 kΩ 5.6 kΩ |
| 5.6 kΩ |
| 5.6 kΩ |
| 5.6 kΩ |
| 5.6 kΩ |
| 5.6 kΩ |
| 5.6 kΩ |
| 5.6 kΩ |
8-3
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
8.1.3 Counter Function
(1) Counter mode
(a) High Speed counter module can count High Speed pulses which can not be processed by
CPU module’s counter Function Block (CTU, CTD, CTUD, etc.), up to binary value of 32 bits (-
2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647).
(b) Available input is 1-phase input, 2-phase input and CW/ CCW input.
(c) Count increasing/decreasing methods are as follows;
1) For 1-phase input: a) Increasing/decreasing count operation by program setting
b) Increasing/decreasing count operation by B-phase input signal
2) For 2-phase input: setting by difference in phase between A-phase and B-phase
3) For CW/CCW input: Increasing operation if B-phase is LOW with A-phase input, and
Decreasing operation if A-phase is LOW with B-phase input.
(d) Auxiliary modes are as follows;
1) Count Latch
2) Count function about the number of revolution per unit time
(e) Pulse input mode
1) 1 phase count mode
a) Increasing/decreasing count operation by program setting
● 1-phase 1-input 1-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising and increasing/decreasing will be decided by the
applicable program.
| Increasing/Decreasing classification | A-phase input pulse rising |
A-phase input pulse falling |
| Increasing/decreasing count setting signal Off | Increasing count | - |
| Increasing/decreasing count setting signal On | Decreasing count | - |
● Operation example
b) Increasing/decreasing count operation by B-phase input signal
● 1-phase 2-input 1-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising and increasing/decreasing will be decided by B-phase.
| Increasing/Decreasing classification | A-phase input pulse rising |
A-phase input pulse falling |
| B-phase input pulse Off | Increasing count | - |
| B-phase input pulse On | Decreasing count | - |
A-phase input pulse
Increasing
| Decreasing | ||||
| signal 10 |
||||
| 11 | 12 | 13 | 10 | 11 |
| 12 On |
11 | |||
| Off |
Increasing
Increasing/Decreasing
count setting Count value 8-4
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
● Operation example
2) 2-phase count mode
a) 2-phase 4-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse and B-phase input pulse count at rising/falling respectively. If A-phase
input is antecedent to B-phase input, increasing operation starts, and if B-phase input is
antecedent to A-phase input, decreasing operation starts.
▪ Operation example
3) CW(Clockwise)/CCW(Counter Clockwise) operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising , or B-phase input pulse counts at rising.
Increasing operation executed when B-phase input pulse is Low with A-phase input pulse at
rising, and Decreasing operation executed when A-phase input pulse is Low with B-phase
input pulse at rising.
| Increasing/Decreasing classification |
A-phase input pulse High | A-phase input pulse Low |
| B-phase input pulse High | - | decreasing count |
| B-phase input pulse Low | Increasing count | - |
▪ Operation example
| Increasing | Decreasing | |||||||||
| 2 se |
111214 | |||||||||
| 3 4 | ||||||||||
| 5 | 8 | 9 | 13 | 12 | 9 | 8 | 5 | 4 | ||
| 6 | 7 | 10 | 151 | 4 | 11 | 10 | 7 | 6 | 3 | 2 |
13B-phase input pulse
Count value
A-phase input puB-phase input pulse
Count value
A-phase input pulse
| Increasing | Decreasing | |
| 7 | 11 | |
| 8 | 9 | 10 |
10 9 8 7
Increasing
| Decreasing | |||
| 7 | |||
| 8 | 9 | 7 | 8 |
| 10 | 9 On |
8 | |
| Off |
Increasing
B-phase input pulse
Count value A-phase input pulse
8-5
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(2) Counter mode
2 types of count (Linear counter, Ring counter) can be selected for the applicable use based on
functions.
▪ Counter mode is saved at the following special K area.
| Mode | Area per each channel (word) | Ref. | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Counter mode |
%KW300 | %KW330 | %KW360 | %KW390 | %KW2220 | %KW2250 | %KW2280 | %KW2310 | 0 : 1 : linear ring |
(a) Linear counter
■ Linear Count range: -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647
■ If count value reaches the maximum value while increased, Carry will occur, and if count
value reaches the minimum value while decreased, Borrow will occur.
■ If Carry occurs, count stops and increasing is not available but decreasing is available.
■ If Borrow occurs, count stops and decreasing is not available but increasing is available.
8-6
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(b) Ring count
Set Ring Counter Min. Value and Max. value. Preset value and compared set value should
be in range of ring counter min. value and max. value.
• Ring counter max. and min value is saved at the following special K area.
| type | Area per each channel (Double word) | Ref. | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Ring counter min. value |
%KD154 | %KD169 | %KD184 | %KD199 | %KD1114 | %KD1129 | %KD1144 | %KD1159 | - |
| Ring counter max. value |
%KD155 | %KD170 | %KD185 | %KD200 | %KD1115 | %KD1130 | %KD1145 | %KD1160 | - |
+2,147,483,647
Decreasing Increasing
Borrow
Carry
-2,147,483,648
| Count start point |
8-7
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
▪ Range of Ring counter: user defined min. value ~ user defined max. value
▪ Counter display: in case of using ring counter, user defined max. value is not displayed.
1) During increasing count
■ Even if count value exceeds user-defined maximum value during increasing count,
Carry only occurs and count does not stop differently to Linear Count.
2) During decreasing count
■ Even if count value exceeds user-defined minimum value during decreasing count,
Borrow only occurs and count does not stop differently to Linear Count.
3) Operation when setting Ring Count based on present count value (during increasing
count)
■ If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Error (code no. 27) is occurred and it operates linear counter.
■ If present count value is within user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Present count value starts to increase up to the user-defined maximum value and
down to the user-defined minimum value and keeps counting after Carry occurs.
- Not the maximum but the minimum value only is displayed with count kept on as
shown below.
Borrow occurred
Ring Count
maximum value
Preset value
Ring Count
Minimum value (0)
| Present positi | on | ○: ●: |
Not included
Included
| ○: ●: |
Present posit | ion |
Not included
Included
Carry occurred
Ring Count
maximum value
Preset value
Ring Count
minimum value
8-8
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
4) Operation when setting Ring Count based on present count value (during decreasing count)
■ If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Error (code no. 27) is occurred and it operates linear counter.
■ If present count value is within user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Present count value starts to decrease down to the user-defined minimum value and up to
the user-defined maximum value and keeps counting after Borrow occurs.
| (1) Based on count value within or out of user-defined range, count will be decided to be within or out of the range when setting Ring Count. (2) Ring Count setting when count value is out of the range is regarded as user’s mistake. The count is not available within the Ring Count range. (3) Use preset function or the like when using Ring Count so to surely position the count value within the range. |
| Remark |
2,147,483,647
Ring Count
maximum value
-2,147,483,648
Ring Count
minimum value
※ If within the user-defined
range
Carry occurred
| Carry occurred | |
| Present position | ○: Not included ●: Included |
| Present position |
※ If out of the user-defined
range
2,147,483,647
Ring Count
maximum value
-2,147,483,648
Ring Count
minimum value
※If within the userdefined range
| Borrow occurred Present position |
Borrow occurred ○: ●: I |
| Present position |
※If out of the userdefined range
Not included
ncluded
8-9
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(3) Compared output
(a) High Speed counter module has a compared output function used to compare present count
value with compared value in size to output as compared.
(b) Available compared outputs are 2 for 1 channel, which can be used separately.
(c) Compared output conditions are 7 associated with >, =, < .
(d) Parameter setting
■ Comp. output mode setting
■ Upper setting value is saved in special K area.
| Compared output condition | Memory address (word) | Value*2) | |
| Comp output 0 | Comp output 1 | ||
| Present Value < Compared Value | CH0: %KW302 CH1: %KW332 CH2: %KW362 CH3: %KW392 CH4: %KW2222 CH5: %KW2252 CH6: %KW2282 CH7: %KW2312 |
CH0: %KW303 CH1: %KW333 CH2: %KW363 CH3: %KW393 CH4: %KW2223 CH5: %KW2253 CH6: %KW2283 CH7: %KW2313 |
Set to “0” |
| Present Value ≤ Compared Value | Set to “1” | ||
| Present Value = Compared Value | Set to “2” | ||
| Present Value ≥ Compared Value | Set to “3” | ||
| Present Value > Compared Value | Set to “4” | ||
| Compared value 1 ≤ Count value ≤ Compared value 2 | Set to “5” | ||
| Count value ≤ Compared value 1, Count value ≥ Compared value 2 |
Set to “6” |
*2) If compared output mode set value is other than 0~6 at using counter, error code ‘23’ occurs.
8-10
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
■ In order to output the compared output signal, compared output enable flag set to ‘1’ after
compared output condition set.
| Classification | Area per channel | Operation | |||||||
| Ch. 0 | Ch. 1 | Ch. 2 | Ch. 3 | Ch. 4 | Ch. 5 | Ch. 6 | Ch. 7 | ||
| Count enable signal |
%KX4160 | %KX4320 | %KX4480 | %KX4640 | %KX34880 | %KX35040 | %KX35200 | %KX35360 | 0:disable, 1: enable |
| Compared 0 enable signal |
%KX4164 | %KX4324 | %KX4484 | %KX4644 | %KX34884 | %KX35044 | %KX35204 | %KX35364 | 0: disable, 1: enable |
| Compared 1 enable signal |
%KX4167 | %KX4327 | %KX4487 | %KX4687 | %KX34887 | %KX35047 | %KX35207 | %KX36367 | 0: disable, 1: enable |
■ In order to make external output, the compared coincidence output signal (P20~P2F) must
be set. If Compared output contact is ‘Off’ at Special Module Parameter Setting of XG5000,
Compared coincidence output signal (internal device) is only output.
| Classification | Area per channel | Operation | ||||||
| Ch. 0 | Ch. 1 | Ch. 2 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch. 6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Compared coincidence output signal 0 |
%KX4178 | %KX4338 | %KX4498 | %KX4658 | %KX3489 8 |
%KX3505 8 |
%KX35218 | 0: Compared output Off 1: Compared output On |
| Compared coincidence output signal 1 |
%KX4179 | %KX4339 | %KX4499 | %KX4659 | %KX3489 9 |
%KX3505 9 |
%KX35219 | 0: Compared output Off 1: Compared output On |
• Comp. output point (%QX0.0.0 ~ %QX0.0.15) setting
8-11
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(e) Detail of comparator output
It describes detail of comparator output (based on comparator output 0)
1) Mode 0 (Present value < Compared value)
If counted present value is less than the minimum value of compared output 0, output
is sent out, and if present value increases to be equal to or greater than the minimum
value of compared output 0, output is not sent out.
2) Mode1 (Count value ≤ Compared value)
If present count value is less than or equal to the minimum set value of compared
output 0, output is sent out, and if count value increases to be greater than the
minimum set value of compared output 0, output is not sent out.
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
| 123460 |
| ) |
Count value
Compared output 0
min. set value
Compared output 0
Output Signal
Compared output 0
Enable
External output
(in case of
designated outputCount value
Compared output
| 0 | |
| 0 | |
| 0 | |
| 123456 | 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462 |
| 123460 |
Min. set value
Compared Output output signal
Compared Output Enable
External output
(in case of
designated output)
8-12
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
3) Mode 2 (Count value = Compared value)
If present count value is equal to the minimum set value of compared output 0, output is sent
out. In order to turn the output Off, Compared output Enable signal 0 or Compared
Coincidence Output Enable signal 0 is to be Off.
4) Mode 3 (Count value ≥ Compared value)
If present count value is greater than or equal to the minimum set value of compared
output 0, output is sent out, and if count value decreases to be less than the minimum set
value of compared output 0, output is not sent out.
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
| 123457 |
| 0 |
| 0 |
| 0 |
Count value
Compared output Min. set value
External output
(in case of designated output)
Compared Output output signal
Compared Output Enable
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
| 123460 |
| 0 |
| 0 |
| 0 |
Count value
Compared output Min. set value
External output
(in case of designated output)
Compared Output output signal
Compared Output Enable
8-13
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
5) Mode 4 (Count value > Compared Output value)
■ If present count value is greater than the minimum set value of compared output 0, output is
sent out, and if count value decreases to be less than or equal to the minimum set value of
compared output 0, output is not sent out.
6) Mode 5
(Section comparison: Min. set value of Compared Output 0 ≤ Count value ≤ Max. set value
of Compared Output 0)
■ If present count value is greater than or equal to the minimum set value of compared
output 0 and less than or equal to the maximum set value of compared output 0, output is
sent out, and if count value increases/decreases to exceed compared value’s range,
output is not sent out.
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
| 123459 |
| 0 |
| 0 |
| 0 |
Count value
Compared Output Min. set value
External output
(in case of designated output)
Compared Output output signal
Compared Output output Enable
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
| 123458 |
| 123460 |
Count value
Compared Output 0
Min. set value
Compared Output 0
Max. set value
External output
(in case of designated output
| ) |
Compared Output 0
output signal
Compared Output 0
output Enable
8-14
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
7) Mode 6 (Count value ≤ Min. set value of Compared Output 0 or Count value ≥ Max. set
value of Compared Output 0)
■ If present count value is less than or equal to the minimum set value of compared 0 and
greater than or equal to the maximum set value of compared 0, output is sent out, and if
count value increases/decreases to exceed compared value’s range, output is not sent out.
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
| 123457 |
| 0 |
| 123461 |
| 0 |
| 0 |
Count value
Compared Output Min. set value
Compared Output 0
Max. set value
External output
(in case of designated
Compared Output output signal
Compared Output output Enable
8-15
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(4) Carry signal
(a) Carry signal occurs
1) When count range maximum value of 2,147,483,647 is reached during Linear Count.
2) When user-defined maximum value of Ring Count changed to the minimum value during Ring
Count.
(b) Count when Carry Signal occurs
1) Count stops if Carry occurs during Linear Count.
2) Count does not stop even if Carry occurs during Ring Count.
(c) Carry reset
1) The Carry generated can be cancelled by Carry/Borrow reset signal On.
| Classification | Device area per channel | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | |
| Carry signal | %KX4176 | %KX4336 | %KX4496 | %KX4656 | %KX34896 | %KX35056 | %KX35126 | %KX35376 |
(5) Borrow signal
(a) Borrow signal occurs
1) When count range minimum value of -2,147,483,648 is reached during Linear Count.
2) When user-defined minimum value of Ring Count changed to the maximum value during
Ring Count.
(b) Count when Borrow signal occurs
1) Count stops if Borrow occurs during Linear Count.
2) Count does not stop even if Borrow occurs during Ring Count.
(c) Borrow reset
1) The Borrow generated can be cancelled by Carry/Borrow reset signal On.
| Classification | Device area per channel | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | |
| Borrow signal | %KX4177 | %KX4337 | %KX4497 | %KX4657 | %KX34897 | %KX35057 | %KX35127 | %KX35376 |
8-16
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(6) Revolution/Unit time
While the Flag about the number of revolution per unit time is On, it counts the number of input
pulses for a specified time.
(a) Setting
1) Set the unit time and the number of pulse per 1 revolution.
Setting value is saved at the following special K area and user can designate directly.
| Class | Device per each channel (Word) | Setting range |
|||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Unit time | %KW322 | %KW352 | %KW382 | %KW412 | %KW2242 | %KW2272 | %KW2302 | %KW2332 | 1~60000㎳ |
| Pulse/Rev value |
%KW323 | %KW353 | %KW383 | %KW413 | %KW2243 | %KW2273 | %KW2303 | %KW2333 | 1~60000 |
2) In case of using Rev/unit time function, enable the following special K area
| Class | Device per each channel (Word) | Operation | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Rev/unit time command |
%KX4165 | %KX4325 | %KX4485 | %KX4645 | %KX34885 | %KX35045 | %KX35205 | %KX35365 | 0: disable 1: enable |
3) Rev/unit time value is saved at the following special K area.
| Class | Device per each channel (Word) | Ref. | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Rev/unit time |
%KD132 | %KD137 | %KD142 | %KD147 | %KD1029 | %KD1097 | %KD1102 | %KD1107 | - |
8-17
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(b) Count function of Revolution/Unit time is used to count the number of pulses for a
specified time while auxiliary mode enable signal is On.
(c) With the displayed number of pulses updated for a specified time and the number of
pulses per revolution input, Revolution/Unit time can be counted.
(d) Number of Revolution per 1 second is indicated after number of pulse per 1 revolution is
set and time is set to 1 second (1000ms). In order to indicate by Revolutions per minute
(RPM), the operation is executed in program.
(e) The example that number of pulse per 1 revolution set to ‘1’ and time is set to 1000 ms is
as shown below. (Ch0)
(f) In order to indicate revolution per minute (RPM), the following program is necessary as
shown below. Use MUL function block and save RPM value at revolution per minute (LINT
type) as 64 bit. At this time, first, change revolution per second (DINT type) to LINT type.
Command
Count value
1000
500
0
| 300 | 400 | ||
| 700 | 500 | ||
| 350 | |||
| 1000㎳ 100 |
1000㎳ 300 |
1000㎳ 200 |
1000㎳ 150 |
Revolution
per time
8-18
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(g) The example that number of pulse per 1 revolution set to ‘10’ and time is set to 60,000 ms
is as shown below.
(7) Count latch
When Count latch signal is On, present count value is latched.
▪ Setting
If present counter value is to latch, Count Latch function is set ‘Use’.
| Class | Device area per channel | Operation | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Count latch command |
%KX4166 | %KX4326 | %KX4486 | %KX4646 | %KX34886 | %KX35046 | %KX35206 | %KX35366 | 0: disable 1: enable |
▪ Count latch function is operated when Count latch signal is On. Namely, counter value is not
cleared when power supply Off =>On and mode change, it is counted from previous value.
▪ In latch counter function, internal or external preset function has to use for clearing present
value.
Command
Count value
1000
500
0
| 300 | 400 | ||
| 700 | 500 | ||
| 350 | |||
| 60000㎳ 10 |
60000㎳ 30 |
60000㎳ 20 |
60000㎳ 15 |
Revolution
per time
8-19
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(8) Preset function
It changes the current value into preset value.
There are two types of preset function, internal preset and external preset. External preset is fixed
as input contact point.
• Preset setting value is saved at the following special K area.
| Type | Area per each channel (Double word) | Ref. | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Internal preset value |
%KD152 | %KD167 | %KD182 | %KD197 | %KD1112 | %KD1127 | %KD1142 | %KD1157 | - |
| External preset value |
%KD153 | %KD168 | %KD183 | %KD198 | %KD1113 | %KD1128 | %KD1143 | %KD1158 | - |
• Preset command is specified through the following special K area, external preset is used by
executing the designated input contact point after allowance bit is on.
| Type | Area per each channel (Bit) | Ref. | |||||||
| Ch.0 | Ch.1 | Ch.2 | Ch.3 | Ch.4 | Ch.5 | Ch.6 | Ch.7 | ||
| Internal preset command |
%KX4161 | %KX4321 | %KX4481 | %KX4641 | %KX34881 | %KX35041 | %KX35201 | %KX35361 | - |
| External preset allowance |
%KX412 | %KX4322 | %KX4482 | %KX4642 | %KX34882 | %KX35042 | %KX35202 | %KX35362 | - |
| External preset command |
%QX0.0.8 | %QX0.0.9 | %QX0.0.10 | %QX0.0.11 | %QX0.0.12 | %QX0.0.13 | %QX0.0.14 | %QX0.0.15 | - |
8-20
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
| 8.2 Installation and Wiring |
8.2.1 Precaution for wiring
Pay attention to the counteractions against wiring noise especially for High-speed pulse input.
(1) Surely use twisted pair shielded cable, grounded with 3 class applied.
(2) Keep away from power cable or I/O line which may cause noise.
(3) Stabilized power should be used for filter.
▶ Connect A-phase only for 1-phase input.
▶ Connect A-phase and B-phase for 2-phase input.
8.2.2 Example of wiring
(1) In case of pulse generator (encoder) is voltage output type
Pulse Generator
| CHSC |
| A |
| B |
| COM |
24V
24VG
(2) In case of pulse generator is open collector type
Pulse Generator
| A |
| COM |
| B |
24V
24VG
High-speed counter input
High-speed counter input
8-21
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
| 8.3 Internal Memory |
8.3.1 Special area for High-speed counter
Parameter and operation command area of built-in high-speed counter use a special K device.
If values set in parameter are changed, it works with the changed values. At the moment, makes sure
to use APM_WRT function to save the changed value to flash. If not saved in flash, the changed
values with the power off => on and mode changed may not be maintained.
▪ The following example shows that the internal preset values of CH1 set in parameter are changed by
program and saved in flash.
- Receiving a command (Change Preset), it moves (MOV) the new internal preset value (5000) to
the CH0 internal Preset area (%KD152) by using MOVE function.
- To save the changed settings into flash, it uses APM_WRT command. At the moment, slot
information is set to ’0’ in case of built-in function.
“0”input
0:Positioning
1:High speed counter
2:PID
“0”input
“0”input
메모 [S1]:
8-22
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(1) Parameter setting area
| Parameter | Description | Device area per channel | Remark | ||||
| Value | Setting | Ch 0 | Ch 1 | Ch 2 | Ch 3 | ||
| Ch 4 | Ch 5 | Ch 6 | Ch 7 | ||||
| Counter mode |
h0000 | Linear count | %KW300 | %KW330 | %KW360 | %KW390 | Word |
| h0001 | Ring count | %KW2220 | %KW2250 | %KW2280 | %KW2310 | ||
| Pulse input mode setting |
h0000 | 1 phase 1 input 1 multiplication | %KW301 | %KW331 | %KW361 | %KW391 | Word |
| h0001 | 1 phase 2 input 1 multiplication | ||||||
| h0002 | CW / CCW | %KW2221 | %KW2251 | %KW2281 | %KW2311 | Word | |
| h0003 | 2 phase 4 multiplication | ||||||
| Comp. Output 0 mode setting |
h0000 | (Magnitude) < | %KW302 | %KW332 | %KW362 | %KW392 | Word |
| h0001 | (Magnitude) ≤ | ||||||
| h0002 | (Magnitude) = | ||||||
| h0003 | (Magnitude) ≥ | ||||||
| h0004 | (Magnitude) > | %KW2222 | %KW2252 | %KW2282 | %KW2312 | ||
| h0005 | (Range) Include | ||||||
| h0006 | (Range) Exclude | ||||||
| Comp. Output 1 mode setting |
h0000 | (Magnitude) < | %KW303 | %KW333 | %KW363 | %KW393 | Word |
| h0001 | (Magnitude) ≤ | ||||||
| h0002 | (Magnitude) = | ||||||
| h0003 | (Magnitude) ≥ | ||||||
| h0004 | (Magnitude) > | %KW2223 | %KW2253 | %KW2283 | %KW2313 | ||
| h0005 | (Range) Include | ||||||
| h0006 | (Range) Exclude | ||||||
| Internal preset value setting |
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 | %KD152 | %KD167 | %KD182 | %KD197 | Double word |
|
| %KD1112 | %KD1127 | %KD1142 | %KD1157 | ||||
| External preset value setting |
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 | %KD153 | %KD168 | %KD183 | %KD198 | Double word |
|
| %KD1113 | %KD1128 | %KD1143 | %KD1158 |
8-23
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
| Parameter | Description | Device area per channel | Remark | ||||
| Value | Setting | Ch 0 | Ch 1 | Ch 2 | Ch 3 | ||
| Ch 4 | Ch 5 | Ch 6 | Ch 7 | ||||
| Ring counter min. value setting |
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,645 | %KD154 | %KD169 | %KD184 | %KD199 | DWord | |
| %KD1114 | %KD1129 | %KD1144 | %KD1159 | ||||
| Ring counter max. value setting |
-2,147,483,646 2,147,483,647 | %KD155 | %KD170 | %KD185 | %KD200 | DWord | |
| %KD1115 | %KD1130 | %KD1145 | %KD1160 | ||||
| Comp. output min. value setting |
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 | %KD156 | %KD171 | %KD186 | %KD201 | DWord | |
| %KD1116 | %KD1131 | %KD1146 | %KD1161 | ||||
| Comp. output max. value setting |
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 | %KD157 | %KD172 | %KD187 | %KD202 | DWord | |
| %KD1117 | %KD1132 | %KD1147 | %KD1162 | ||||
| Comp. output 0 point designation |
HFFFF | No use | %KW320 | %KW350 | %KW380 | %KW410 | Word |
| h0000 | %QX0.0.1 | ||||||
| h0001 | %QX0.0.2 | ||||||
| h0002 | %QX0.0.3 | ||||||
| h0003 | %QX0.0.4 | ||||||
| h0004 | %QX0.0.5 | ||||||
| h0005 | %QX0.0.6 | ||||||
| h0006 | %QX0.0.7 | ||||||
| h0007 | %QX0.0.8 | ||||||
| h0008 | %QX0.0.9 | %KW2240 | %KW2270 | %KW2300 | %KW2330 | ||
| h0009 | %QX0.0.10 | ||||||
| h000A | %QX0.0.11 | ||||||
| h000B | %QX0.0.12 | ||||||
| h000C | %QX0.0.13 | ||||||
| h000D | %QX0.0.14 | ||||||
| h000E | %QX0.0.15 | ||||||
| h000F | %QX0.0.16 |
8-24
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
| Parameter | Description | Device area per channel | Remark | ||||
| Value | Setting | Ch 0 | Ch 1 | Ch 2 | Ch 3 | ||
| Ch 4 | Ch 5 | Ch 6 | Ch 7 | ||||
| Comp. output 1 point designation |
HFFFF | No use | %KW321 | %KW351 | %KW381 | %KW411 | Word |
| h0000 | %QX0.0.1 | ||||||
| h0001 | %QX0.0.2 | ||||||
| h0002 | %QX0.0.3 | ||||||
| h0003 | %QX0.0.4 | ||||||
| h0004 | %QX0.0.5 | ||||||
| h0005 | %QX0.0.6 | ||||||
| h0006 | %QX0.0.7 | ||||||
| h0007 | %QX0.0.8 | ||||||
| h0008 | %QX0.0.9 | %KW2241 | %KW2271 | %KW2301 | %KW2331 | ||
| h0009 | %QX0.0.10 | ||||||
| h000A | %QX0.0.11 | ||||||
| h000B | %QX0.0.12 | ||||||
| h000C | %QX0.0.13 | ||||||
| h000D | %QX0.0.14 | ||||||
| h000E | %QX0.0.15 | ||||||
| h000F | %QX0.0.16 | ||||||
| Unit time [ms] | 1 ~ 60,000 ms | %KW322 | %KW352 | %KW382 | %KW412 | Word | |
| %KW2242 | %KW2272 | %KW2302 | %KW2332 | ||||
| Pulse/Rev.value | 1 ~ 60,000 | %KW323 | %KW353 | %KW383 | %KW413 | Word | |
| %KW2243 | %KW2273 | %KW2303 | %KW2333 |
8-25
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(2) Operation command
| Parameter | Device area per channel | |||||||
| Ch 0 | Ch 1 | Ch 2 | Ch 3 | Ch 4 | Ch 5 | Ch 6 | Ch 7 | |
| Counter enabling | %KX4160 | %KX4320 | %KX4480 | %KX4640 | %KX34880 | %KX35040 | %KX35200 | %KX35360 |
| Internal preset designation of counter |
%KX4161 | %KX4321 | %KX4481 | %KX4641 | %KX34881 | %KX35041 | %KX35201 | %KX35361 |
| External preset enabling of counter |
%KX4162 | %KX4322 | %KX4482 | %KX4642 | %KX34882 | %KX35042 | %KX35202 | %KX35362 |
| Designation of decremental counter |
%KX4163 | %KX4323 | %KX4483 | %KX4643 | %KX34883 | %KX35043 | %KX35203 | %KX35363 |
| Comp. output 0 enabling | %KX4164 | %KX4324 | %KX4484 | %KX4644 | %KX34884 | %KX35044 | %KX35204 | %KX35364 |
| Comp. output 1 enabling | %KX4167 | %KX4327 | %KX4487 | %KX4647 | %KX34887 | %KX35047 | %KX35207 | %KX35367 |
| Enabling of revolution time per unit time |
%KX4165 | %KX4325 | %KX4485 | %KX4645 | %KX34885 | %KX35045 | %KX35205 | %KX35365 |
| Designation of latch counter |
%KX4166 | %KX4326 | %KX4486 | %KX4646 | %KX34886 | %KX35046 | %KX35206 | %KX35366 |
| Carry signal (Bit) | %KX4176 | %KX4336 | %KX4496 | %KX4656 | %KX34896 | %KX35056 | %KX35216 | %KX35376 |
| Borrow signal | %KX4177 | %KX4337 | %KX4497 | %KX4657 | %KX34897 | %KX35057 | %KX35217 | %KX35377 |
| Comp. output 0 signal | %KX4168 | %KX4328 | %KX4488 | %KX4648 | %KX34888 | %KX35048 | %KX35208 | %KX35368 |
| Comp. output 1 signal | %KX4169 | %KX4329 | %KX4489 | %KX4649 | %KX34889 | %KX35049 | %KX35209 | %KX35369 |
(3) Area of monitoring
| Parameter | Device area per channel | |||||||
| Ch 0 | Ch 1 | Ch 2 | Ch 3 | Ch 4 | Ch 5 | Ch 6 | Ch 7 | |
| Current counter value | %KD131 | %KD136 | %KD141 | %KD146 | %KD1091 | %KD1096 | %KD1101 | %KD1106 |
| Revolution per unit time | %KD132 | %KD137 | %KD142 | %KD147 | %KD1092 | %KD1097 | %KD1102 | %KD1107 |
8-26
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
8.3.2 Error code
It describes errors of the built-in high-speed counter.
▪ Error occurred is saved in the following area.
| Category | Device area per channel | Remark | |||||||
| Ch0 | Ch1 | Ch2 | Ch3 | Ch4 | Ch5 | Ch6 | Ch7 | ||
| Error code | %KW266 | %KW276 | %KW286 | %KW296 | %KW2186 | %KW2196 | %KW2206 | %KW2216 | Word |
▪ Error codes and descriptions
| Error code (Decimal) |
Description |
| 20 | Counter type is set out of range |
| 21 | Pulse input type is set out of range |
| 22 | Requesting #1(3,)channel Run during the operation of #0(2) channel 2 phase( * During #0(2) channel 2 phase inputting, using #1(3)channel is not possible. |
| 23 | Compared output type setting is set out of range. |
| 25 | Internal preset value is set out of counter range |
| 26 | External present value is set out of counter range |
| 27 | Ring counter setting is set out of range * Note ring counter setting should be 2 and more. |
| 28 | Compared output min. value is set out of permissible max. input range |
| 29 | Compared output max. value is set out of permissible max. input range |
| 30 | Error of Compared output min. value>Compared output max. value |
| 31 | Compared output is set out of the default output value |
| 34 | Set value of Unit time is out of the range |
| 35 | Pulse value per 1 revolution is set out of range |
| 36 | Compared output min. value is set out of permissible max. input range (Compared output1) |
| 37 | Compared output max. value is set out of permissible max. input range (Compared output1) |
| 38 | Error of Compared output min. value>Compared output max. value (Compared output1) |
| 39 | Compared output is set out of the default output value (Compared output1) |
| Remark |
| ▪ If two and more errors occur, the module saves the latter error code and removes the former one. |
8-27
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
| 8.4 Examples: Using High-speed Counter |
It describes examples of using high-speed counter.
(1) Setting high-speed counter parameter
How to set types of parameters to operate a high-speed counter is described as follows.
(a) Set 『Internal Parameters』 in the basic project window.
(b) Selecting high-speed counter opens a window to set high-speed counter parameters as follows.
For details regarding each parameter setting, refer to 8.1~8.3.
(Every parameter settings are saved in the special K device area.)
8-28
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(c) Turn ‘ON’ the high-speed counter Enable signal (CH0:%KX4160) in the program.
(d) To use additional functions of the high-speed counter, you needs to turn on the flag allowing
an operation command.
* Refer to 2. Operation Command, <8.3.1 Special K Area for High-speed Counter>
For instance, turn on %KX4165 bit if among additional functions, rotation number function is used.
(e) Upon the setting, download program and parameter to PLC.
8-29
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(2) Monitoring and setting command
Monitoring and command setting of high-speed counter are described as follows.
(a) If starting a monitor and clicking a Special Module Monitor, the following window is opened.
8-30
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(b) Clicking 『Monitor』 shows monitor and test window of high-speed counter.
| Item | Description |
| FLAG Monitor | Show flag monitoring and command window of high-speed counter |
| Start Monitoring | Start monitoring each item (special K device area monitor). |
| Test | Write each item setting to PLC. (Write the setting to special K device) |
| Close | Close monitor |
8-31
Chapter 8 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
(c) Clicking 『Start Monitoring』 shows the high-speed counter monitor display, in which you
may set each parameter. At this moment, if any, changed values are not saved if power off=>
on or mode is changed.
(d) Clicking『FLAG Monitor』 shows the monitor of each flag in high-speed counter, in which
you may direct operation commands by flags (clicking commands reverse turn).
8-32
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
9.1 Safety Instruction
Please design protection circuit at the external of PLC for entire system to operate safely because an
abnormal output or an malfunction may cause accident when any error of external power or malfunction
of PLC module.
(1) It should be installed at the external side of PLC to emergency stop circuit, protection circuit,
interlock circuit of opposition action such as forward /reverse operation and interlock circuit for
protecting machine damage such as upper/lower limit of positioning.
(2) If PLC detects the following error, all operation stops and all output is off.
(Available to hold output according to parameter setting)
(a) When over current protection equipment or over voltage protection operates
(b) When self diagnosis function error such as WDT error in PLC CPU occurs
In case of error about IO control part that is not detected by PLC CPU, all output is off.
Design Fail Safe circuit at the external of PLC for machine to operate safely. Refer to 10.2 Fail Safe
circuit.
(1) Because of error of output device, Relay, TR, etc., output may not be normal. About output signal that
may cause the heavy accident, design supervisory circuit to external.
In case load current more than rating or over current by load short flows continuously, danger of heat, fire
may occur so design safety circuit to external such as fuse.
Design for external power supply to be done first after PLC power supply is done. If external power
supply is done first, it may cause accident by misoutput, misoperation.
In case communication error occurs, for operation status of each station, refer to each communication
manual.
In case of controlling the PLC while peripheral is connected to CPU module, configure the interlock circuit
for system to operate safely. During operation, in case of executing program change, operation status
change, familiarize the manual and check the safety status. Especially, in case of controlling long
distance PLC, user may not response to error of PLC promptly because of communication error or etc.
Limit how to take action in case of data communication error between PLC CPU and external device
adding installing interlock circuit at the PLC program.
Danger
스타일 정의: 알아두기1: 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0.5 cm, 내어쓰기: 2.83
글자
스타일 정의: 본문설명5: 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 4.61 글자, 내어쓰기: 0.01
글자, 첫 줄: -0.01 글자
스타일 정의: 본문설명3: 들여쓰기:
왼쪽 0.17 글자, 첫 줄: 0 글자
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
9 -1
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
Don’t close the control line or communication cable to main circuit or power line. Distance should be more
than 100mm. It may cause malfunction by noise.
In case of controlling lamp load, heater, solenoid valve, etc. in case of Off -> On, large current (10 times of
normal current) may flows, so consider changing the module to module that has margin at rated current.
Process output may not work properly according to difference of delay of PLC main power and external
power for process (especially DC in case of PLC power On-Off and of start time.
For example, in case of turning on PLC main power after supplying external power for process, DC output
module may malfunction when PLC is on, so configure the circuit to turn on the PLC main power first
Or in case of external power error or PLC error, it may cause the malfunction.
Not to lead above error to entire system, part causing breakdown of machine or accident should be
configured at the external of PLC
Danger
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
9 -2
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
9.1.1 Fail safe circuit
(1) example of system design (In case of not using ERR contact point of power module)
In case of AC In case of AC . DC
(2) 시스템 설계 회로 예 (전원모듈의 ERR 접점을 사용하지 않는 경우)
P080 은 0.5 초 간격으로 On/Off 를 반복하므로 무접점의 출력모듈을 사용하여 주십시오.
| (5) 소비 전력 계산 Pn |
(Lamp or buzzer) | SW |
PLC 제어반내의 온도는 사용주변 온도인 55℃이하로 억제할 필요가 있습니다.
제어반내의 방열 설계를 위하여 내부에 있는 각기긱들의 평균 소비 전력(발열량)
(a) PLC 시스템의 전력 소비 블록도
Output for warning
(Lamp or buzzer)
Power off to output
device
Run by F009C
Check direct
current
Signal input
| Timer | setting |
| which DC input | |
| signal | is |
configured.
Voltage relay
equipped
RUN by F009C
Output for warning
Power Off to
output device
Configure part that
lead opposite operation
or breakdown such as
interlock circuit
forward, reverse
revolution by external
interlock circuit
(Emergency
stop,
stop by limit
switch)
Emergency stop,
Stop by limit
Start sequence of power
In case of AC
(1) Turn on power
(2) Run CPU.
(3) Turn on start switch
(4) Output device runs by program through
magnetic contactor (MC) [On] Start sequence of power
In case of AC DC
Run CPU after power is on
(1) Turn on power and run CPU
(1)(2) Turn on RA2 as DC power on
(2)(3) Turn on timer after DC power is stable.
(3)(4) Turn on start switch
(4)(5) Output device runs by program through
magnetic contactor (MC) [On]
F0045
F009C
F0045
Pm
Pm
Pm
F009C
Pm
Pm
Tm
Pm
Pm
PLC RUN output
Start available as
RA1
Trans
Fuse
Start
switch
Stop
SW Input module
Program
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Start Program
switch
Stop
Trans
Fuse
Trans
Fuse
Fuse
DC power
Power
Power
RUN by
F009Power off by
t t d i C
서식 있음: 글꼴: 12 pt, 굵게
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 1
글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0.04
cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0.04
cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm, 첫 줄: 0.04 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0.04
cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0.04
cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0.04
cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm, 내어쓰기: 0.96
글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 3
글자, 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 글꼴: (영어) Arial
서식 있음: 글머리 기호 및 번호
매기기
서식 있음: 글머리 기호 및 번호
매기기
9 -3
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(2) System design circuit example (In case of using ERR contact point of power module)
Checking DC
current
Signal input
Timer setting
which DC input
signal is
configured.
Output for warning
(Lamp or buzzer)
(Emergency stop,
stop by limit)
Stop by ERR
Error Off
Configure part that
lead opposite operation
or breakdown such as
interlock circuit
forward, reverse
revolution by external
interlock circuit
Pm
Pm
Tm
Pm
Tm
Pm
Pn
Pm
F0045
F009C
ERR
ERR contact point off
to output device
power off
RA3
Voltage relay
equipped
Start stop circuit
PLC RUN output
Available to start as
RA1
Start sequence of power
In case of AC DC
(1) Run CPU after turning on power.
(2) Turn on RA2 with DC power supplied
(3) Turn on timer after DC power is stable
(4) Turn on start switch Output device runs by program through magnetic
contactor (MC) [On]
Trans
Fuse
Trans
Fuse
DC power
Fuse
Start
SW
Power
Program
Stop SW
Output module
Output module
서식 있음: 본문설명5, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 왼쪽
서식 있음: 왼쪽
서식 있음: 오른쪽
9 -4
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(3) Fail safe countermeasure in case of PLC error
Error of PLC CPU and memory is detected by self diagnosis but in case error occurs in IO control part, etc.,
CPU can detect the error. At this case, though it is different according to status of error, all contact point is on or
off, so safety may not be guaranteed. Though we do out best to our quality as producer, configure safety circuit
preparing that error occurs in PLC and it lead to breakdown or accident.
System example
| Main unit |
Input 16 point |
Input 16 point |
Input 16 point |
Input 16 point |
Output 16 point |
Output 16 point |
Equip output module for fail safe to last slot of system.
[Fail safe circuit example]
Since P80 turn on/off every 0.5s, use TR output.
F0093
P80
P80
0.5s 0.5s
P80
P81
~
P8F
24V
0V
T1 T2
MC
- +
DC24
MC
T1
T2
L L
External load
CPU unit
Output module
On delay timer
Off delay timer
Output module for fail safe
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽 1.17
글자
서식 있는 표
서식 있음: 가운데
서식 있음: 줄 간격: 1줄
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5, 들여쓰기:
첫 줄: 0 cm, 왼쪽 0 글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
9 -5
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
9.1.2 PLC heat calculation
(1) Power consumption of each part
(a) Power consumption of module
The power conversion efficiency of power module is about 70% and the other 30% is gone
with heat; 3/7 of the output power is the pure power consumption. Therefore, the calculation
is as follows.
• Wpw = 3/7 {(I5V X 5) + (I24V X 24)} (W)
I5V : power consumption of each module DC5V circuit(internal current consumption)
I24V: the average current consumption of DC24V used for output module
(current consumption of simultaneous On point)
If DC24V is externally supplied or a power module without DC24V is used, it is not
applicable.
(b) Sum of DC5V circuit current consumption
The DC5V output circuit power of the power module is the sum of power consumption used
by each module.
• W5V = I5V X 5 (W)
(c) DC24V average power consumption(power consumption of simultaneous On point)
The DC24V output circuit’s average power of the power module is the sum of power
consumption used by each module.
• W24V = I24V X 24 (W)
(d) Average power consumption by output voltage drop of the output module(power consumption
of simultaneous On point)
• Wout = Iout X Vdrop X output point X simultaneous On rate (W)
Iout : output current (actually used current) (A)
Vdrop: voltage drop of each output module (V)
Main unit input
| constant Voltage transformer |
AC power
100V~240V
Comm. Comm. output input Special
DC5V
DC24V
| load Iout Iin 24V AC power 100V~240V |
I5V
IDC power
24V
서식 있음: 글꼴: 12 pt, 굵게
서식 있음: 본문설명6, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 2.54 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명7, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 3.17 cm, 내어쓰기: 0.02
글자
서식 있음: 본문설명6, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 2.54 cm, 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명7, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 3.17 cm, 내어쓰기: 0.02
글자
서식 있음: 본문설명6, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 2.54 cm, 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명7, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 3.17 cm, 내어쓰기: 0.02
글자
서식 있음: 본문설명6, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 2.54 cm, 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명7, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 3.17 cm, 내어쓰기: 0.02
글자
9 -6
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(e) Input average power consumption of input module
(power consumption of simultaneous On point)
• Win = lin X E X input point X simultaneous On rate (W)
Iin: input current (root mean square value in case of AC) (A)
E : input voltage (actually used voltage) (V)
(f) Power consumption of special module power assembly
• WS = I5V X 5 + I24V X 24 + I100V X 100 (W)
The sum of power consumption calculated by each block is the power consumption of the
entire PLC system.
• W = WPW + W5V + W24V + Wout + Win + Ws (W)
Calculate the heats according to the entire power consumption(W) and review the
temperature increase within the control panel.
The calculation of temperature rise within the control panel is displayed as follows.
T = W / UA [°C]
W : power consumption of the entire PLC system (the above calculated value)
A : surface area of control panel [m2]
U : if equalizing the temperature of the control panel by using a fan and others - - - 6
If the air inside the panel is not ventilated - - - - - - - - - - 4
If installing the PLC in an air-tight control panel, it needs heat-protective(control) design
considering the heat from the PLC as well as other devices. If ventilating by vent or fan, inflow of
dust or gas may affect the performance of the PLC system.
서식 있음: 본문설명6, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 2.54 cm, 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명7, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 3.17 cm, 내어쓰기: 0.02
글자
서식 있음: 본문설명6, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 2.54 cm, 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명7, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 3.17 cm, 내어쓰기: 0.02
글자
서식 있음: 본문설명6, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 2.54 cm, 첫 줄: 0 cm
9 -7
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
9.2 Attachment/Detachment of Modules
9.2.1 Attachment/Detachment of modules
Caution in handling
Use PLC in the range of general specification specified by manual.
In case of using out of range, it may cause electric shock, fire, malfunction, damage of product.
Module must be mounted to hook for fixation properly before its fixation. The module may be damaged
from over-applied force. If module is not mounted properly, it may cause malfunction.
Do not drop or impact the module case, terminal block connector.
Do not separate the PCB from case.
(1) Equipment of module
• Eliminate the extension cover at the upper of module.
• Push the module and connect it in agreement with hook for fixation of four edges and hook for
connection at the bottom.
• After connection, get down the hook for fixation at the upper part and lower part and fix it completely.
Warning
Module fixation (Hook)
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0.69
cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 내어쓰기:
0.87 글자, 왼쪽 3.1 글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
9 -8
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(2) Detachment of module
• Get up the hook for fixation of upper part and lower part and disconnect it.
• Detach the module with two hands. (Don’t force over-applied force.)
When separating module, don’t force over-applied power. If so, hook may be damaged.
Hook for module fixation
Caution
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
9 -9
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(3) Installation of module
Since XGB PLC equips Hook for DIN rail (width of rail: 35mm), so XGB can be installed at DIN rail.
(a) When installing module at DIN rail
• Pull Hook for DIN rail and install module at DIN rail
• After installing module at DIN rail, push Hook to fix the module.
| 딘레일 설치용 훅 Hook to install DIN rail |
(b) When installing module at panel directly
• XGB compact type main unit can be installed at panel directly through screw hole.
• When installing module at panel, use M4 type screw.
| 패널 2-ø4.5 장착구멍 Panel Hole for installation |
서식 있음: 글꼴: (영어) Arial
서식 있음: 글꼴: (영어) Arial, 글꼴
색: 자동
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽 1.5
글자, 첫 줄: 2 글자
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽 1.5
글자, 첫 줄: 2 글자
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 글꼴: (영어) Arial
서식 있음: 글꼴: Arial Narrow
서식 있음: 글꼴: (영어) Arial
9 -10
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(34) Module equipment location
Keep the following distance between module and structure or part for well ventilation and easy detachment
and attachment.
*1 : In case height of wiring duct is less than 50 mm (except this 40mm or above)
*2 : In case of equipping cable without removing near module, 20mm or above
*3 : In case of connector type, 80mm or above
(45) Module equipment direction
(a) For easy ventilation, install like the following figure.
Pane
| PLC 20 ㎜ or above |
*3 |
30 ㎜ or above *1
30 ㎜ or above*1
| 5 ㎜ or above*1 | 5 ㎜ |
or above
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽 1.42
글자, 첫 줄: 0 글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽 0.17 글자
9 -11
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(b) Don’t install like the following figure
9 -12
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(65) Distance with other device
To avoid radiation noise or heat, keep the distance between PLC and device (connector and relay) as far as the
following figure.
| Device installed in front of PLC: 100 ㎜ or above |
| Device installed beside PLC: 50 ㎜ or above |
100mm or above
50mm or above
50mm or above
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽 0.18
글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0
글자
서식 있음: 글꼴: 10 pt
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 1
글자
서식 있음: 글꼴: 10 pt
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
9 -13
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
9.2.2 Caution in handling
Here describes caution from open to install
• Don’t drop or impact product.
• Don’t disassemble the PCB from case. It may cause the error.
• In case of wiring, make sure foreign substance not to enter upper part of module. If it enters, eliminate it.
(1) Caution in handling IO module
It describes caution in handling IO module.
(a) Recheck of IO module specification
For input module, be cautious about input voltage, for output module, if voltage that exceeds the max.
open/close voltage is induced, it may cause the malfunction, breakdown or fire.
(b) Used wire
When selecting wire, consider ambient temp, allowed current and minimum size of wire is
AWG22(0.3mm2) or above.
(c) Environment
In case of wiring IO module, if device or material that induce high heat is too close or oil contacts wire
too long time, it may cause short, malfunction or error.
(d) Polarity
Before supplying power of module which has terminal block, check the polarity.
(e) Wiring
• In case of wiring IO with high voltage line or power line, induced obstacle may cause error.
• Let no cable pass the IO operation indication part (LED).
(You can’t discriminate the IO indication.)
• In case induced load is connected with output module, connect the surge killer or diode load to load
in parallel. Connect cathode of diode to + side of power.
.
(f) Terminal block
Check close adhesion status. Let no foreign material of wire enter into PLC when wring terminal block
or processing screw hole. At this case, it may cause malfunction.
(g) Don’t impact to IO module or don’t disassemble the PCB from case.
OUT
COM
Output module
Induced load
Surge killer
OUT
COM
Output module
Induced load
Diode
+ -
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 글꼴 색: 자동
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0 cm,
첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 1.63
cm, 내어쓰기: 0.71 글자, 첫 줄:
-0.71 글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
9 -14
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
9.3 Wire
In case using system, it describes caution about wiring.
When wiring, cut off the external power.
If all power is cut, it may cause electric shock or damage of product.
In case of flowing electric or testing after wiring, equip terminal cover included in product. It not, it may cause
electric shock.
Do D type ground (type 3 ground) or above dedicated for PLC for FG and LG terminal. It may cause electric
shock or malfunction.
When wiring module, check the rated voltage and terminal array and do properly.
If rating is different, it may cause fire, malfunction.
For external connecting connector, use designated device and solder.
If connecting is not safe, it may cause short, fire, malfunction.
For screwing, use designated torque range. If it is not fit, it may cause short, fire, malfunction.
Let no foreign material enter such as garbage or disconnection part into module. It may cause fire, malfunction,
error.
9.3.1Power wiring
(1) In case voltage regulation is larger than specified, connect constant voltage transformer.
(2) Connect noise that include small noise between line and earth.
(When there are many noise, connect insulated transformer.)
Caution
Danger
AC power
| Constant voltage transformer |
AC power
100V~240V
RS-232C
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
19
20
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B A
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
19
20
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
B A
00
IN
10
20
30
O UT
01
11
21
31
02
12
22
32
03
13
23
33
04
14
24
34
05
15
25
35
06
16
26
36
07
17
27
37
08
18
28
38
09
19
29
39
0A
1A
2A
3A
0B
1B
2B
3B
0C
1C
2C
3C
0D
1D
2D
3D
0E
1E
2E
3E
0F
1F
2F
3F
RUN
PWR
ERR
In:24VDC, 7m A
185VA 50/60Hz
XBC- DR64H
AC100-240V
서식 있음: 본문설명2, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 0.18 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0.5
글자, 내어쓰기: 1.83 글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0.5
글자, 내어쓰기: 1.83 글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 내어쓰기:
1.83 글자, 왼쪽 1.42 글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽: 0.5
글자, 내어쓰기: 1.83 글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0
글자
9 -15
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(3) Isolate the PLC power, I/O devices and power devices as follows.
(4) If using DC24V of the power module
(a) Do not connect DC24V of several power modules in parallel. It may cause the destruction of a module.
(b) If a power module can not meet the DC24V output capacity, supply DC24V externally as presented
below.
(5)AC110V/AC220V/DC24V cables should be compactly twisted and connected in the shortest distance.
(6) AC110V/AC220V cable should be as thick as possible(2mm2) to reduce voltage drop.
(7) AC110V/ DC24V cables should not be installed close to main circuit cable(high voltage/high current) and I/O
signal cable. They should be 100mm away from such cables
Main unit
AC220V
Main
power Constant
Voltage
Transformer
PLC
power
Main circuit device
IO power
| AC100 |
-240V
| I O | 24V CPU |
| IO | 24V CPU |
Power
Supply
DC 24V
| I O | 24V CPU |
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0
글자
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 본문설명5
서식 있음: 본문설명4, 들여쓰기:
왼쪽: 1.06 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽 0 글자,
첫 줄: 0 글자
9 -16
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
(8) To prevent surge from lightning, use the lightning surge absorber as presented below.
| Note |
| (1) Isolate the grounding(E1) of lightning surge absorber from the grounding(E2) of the PLC. (2) Select a lightning surge absorber type so that the max. voltage may not the specified allowable voltage of the absorber. |
(9) When noise may be intruded inside it, use an insulated shielding transformer or noise filter.
(10) Wiring of each input power should be twisted as short as possible and the wiring of shielding transformer or
noise filter should not be arranged via a duct.
| E2 |
| PLC I/O device |
| E1 |
Surge absorber to prevent
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 왼쪽 0 글자,
첫 줄: 0 글자
9 -17
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
9.3.2 I/O Device wiring
(1) The size of I/O device cable is limited to 0.3~2 mm2 but it is recommended to select a size(0.3 mm2) to use
conveniently.
(2) Please isolate input signal line from output signal line.
(3) I/O signal lines should be wired 100mm and more away from high voltage/high current main circuit cable.
(4) Batch shield cable should be used and the PLC side should be grounded unless the main circuit cable and
power cable can not be isolated.
(5) When applying pipe-wiring, make sure to firmly ground the piping.
9.3.3 Grounding wiring
(1) The PLC contains a proper noise measure, so it can be used without any separate grounding if there is a
large noise. However, if grounding is required, please refer to the followings.
(2) For grounding, please make sure to use the exclusive grounding.
For grounding construction, apply type 3 grounding(grounding resistance lower than 100 Ω)
(3) If the exclusive grounding is not possible, use the common grounding as presented in B) of the figure below.
A) Exclusive grounding : best B) common grounding : good C) common grounding: defective
(4) Use the grounding cable more than 2 mm2. To shorten the length of the grounding cable, place the grounding
point as close to the PLC as possible.
(5) If any malfunction from grounding is detected, separate the FG of the base from the grounding.
| input output |
PLC Shield cable
RA
DC
| PLC |
| Other devices |
| PLC |
| Other devices |
| PLC | Other devices |
Type 3 Grounding Type 3 Grounding
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0 cm
서식 있음: 들여쓰기: 첫 줄: 0
글자
9 -18
Chapter 9 Installation and Wiring
9.3.4 Specifications of wiring cable
The specifications of cable used for wiring are as follows.
| Types of external connection |
Cable specification (mm2) | |
| Lower limit | Upper limit | |
| Digital input | 0.18 (AWG24) | 1.5 (AWG16) |
| Digital output | 0.18 (AWG24) | 2.0 (AWG14) |
| Analogue I/O | 0.18 (AWG24) | 1.5 (AWG16) |
| Communication | 0.18 (AWG24) | 1.5 (AWG16) |
| Main power | 1.5 (AWG16) | 2.5 (AWG12) |
| Protective grounding | 1.5 (AWG16) | 2.5 (AWG12) |
9 -19
Chapter 10 Maintenance
Chapter 10 Maintenance
Be sure to perform daily and periodic maintenance and inspection in order to maintain the PLC in the best
conditions.
10.1 Maintenance and Inspection
The I/O module mainly consist of semiconductor devices and its service life is semi-permanent. However,
periodic inspection is requested for ambient environment may cause damage to the devices. When inspecting
one or two times per six months, check the following items.
| Check Items | Judgment | Corrective Actions | |
| Change rate of input voltage | Within change rate of input voltage (Less than -15% to +20% ) |
Hold it with the allowable range. | |
| Power supply for input/output | Input/Output specification of each module |
Hold it with the allowable range of each module. | |
| Ambient environment |
Temperature | 0 ~ + 55℃ | Adjust the operating temperature and humidity with the defined range. |
| Humidity | 5 ~ 95%RH | ||
| Vibration | No vibration | Use vibration resisting rubber or the vibration prevention method. |
|
| Play of modules | No play allowed | Securely enrage the hook. | |
| Connecting conditions of terminal screws |
No loose allowed | Retighten terminal screws. | |
| Spare parts | Check the number of Spare parts and their Store conditions |
Cover the shortage and improve the conditions. |
10.2 Daily Inspection
The following table shows the inspection and items which are to be checked daily.
| Check Items | Check Points | Judgment | Corrective Actions |
|
| Connection conditions of Input/Output module |
Check the connecting screws Check module cover. |
Screws should not be loose. | Retighten Screws. | |
| Connecting conditions of terminal block or extension cable |
Check for loose mounting screws. | Screws should not be loose. | Retighten Screws. |
|
| Check the distance between solderless terminals. |
Proper clearance should be provided. | Correct. | ||
| Connecting of expansion cable. | Connector should not be loose. | Correct. | ||
| LED indicator |
PWR LED | Check that the LED is On. | On(Off indicates an error) | See chapter 5. |
| Run LED | Check that the LED is On during Run. | On (flickering indicates an error) | See chapter 5. | |
| Input LED | Check that the LED turns On and Off. | On when input is On, Off when input is off. |
See chapter 5. | |
| Output LED | Check that the LED turns On and Off | On when output is On, Off when output is off |
See chapter 5. |
10-1
Chapter 10 Maintenance
10.3 Periodic Inspection
Check the following items once or twice every six months, and perform the needed corrective actions.
| Check Items | Checking Methods | Judgment | Corrective Actions |
|
| Ambient environment |
Ambient temperature |
-. Measure with thermometer and hygrometer -. measure corrosive gas |
0 ~ 55 °C | Adjust to general standard (Internal environmental standard of control section) |
| Ambient Humidity | 5 ~ 95%RH | |||
| Ambient pollution level |
There should be no corrosive gases |
|||
| PLC Conditions |
Looseness, Ingress |
The module should be move the unit |
The module should be mounted securely. |
Retighten screws |
| dust or foreign material |
Visual check | No dust or foreign material | ||
| Connecting conditions |
Loose terminal screws |
Re-tighten screws | Screws should not be loose | Retighten |
| Distance between terminals |
Visual check | Proper clearance | Correct | |
| Loose connectors | Visual check | Connectors should not be loose. |
Retighten connector mounting screws |
|
| Line voltage check | Measure voltage between input terminals |
AC100~240V:AC85~ 264V DC12/24V:DC9.5 ~ 30V |
Change supply power |
10-2
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
The following explains contents, diagnosis and corrective actions for various errors that can occur during system
operation.
| 11.1 Basic Procedure of Troubleshooting |
System reliability not only depends on reliable equipment but also on short downtimes in the event of fault. The
short discovery and corrective action is needed for speedy operation of system. The following shows the basic
instructions for troubleshooting.
(1) Visual checks
Check the following points.
• Machine operating condition (in stop and operation status)
• Power On/Off
• Status of I/O devices
• Condition of wiring (I/O wires, extension and communications cables)
• Display states of various indicators (such as POWER LED, RUN LED, ERR LED and I/O LED)
After checking them, connect peripheral devices and check the operation status of the PLC and the
program contents.
(2) Trouble Check
Observe any change in the error conditions during the following.
• Switch to the STOP position, and then turn the power on and off.
(3) Narrow down the possible causes of the trouble where the fault lies, i.e.:
• Inside or outside of the PLC ?
• I/O module or another module?
• PLC program?
| 11.2 Troubleshooting |
This section explains the procedure for determining the cause of troubles as well as the errors and corrective
actions.
Symptoms
Is the power LED turned
Off ?
Flowchart used when the POWER LED is turned Off.
Is the ERR LED flickering ? Flowchart used when the ERR LED is flickering.
Are the RUN LED turned
Off ?
Flowchart used when the RUN turned Off.
I/O module doesn’t operate
properly.
Flowchart used when the output load of the output module
doesn’t turn on.
Program cannot be written. Flowchart used when a program can’t be written to the
PLC.
11-1
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart used when the PWR (Power) LED turns Off.
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure used when the power is supplied or the power LED
turns Off during operation.
Yes
Power LED is turned Off.
Is the power supply
operating?
Is the voltage within the
rated power?
Write down the troubleshooting
Questionnaire and contact
the nearest service center.
| Supply the power. |
Does the power LED
turns On?
| Supply the power properly. |
Does the power LED
turns On?
| 1) Eliminate the excess current 2) Switch the input power Off then On. |
Does the power LED
turns On?
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Complete
Over current protection
device activated?
11-2
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.2.2 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the ERR (Error) LED is flickering
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure use when the power is supplied star
ts or the ERR LED is flickering during operation.
| Warning |
| Though warning error appears, PLC system doesn’t stop but corrective action is needed promptly. If not, it may cause the system failure. |
STOP LED goes flickering
No
No
Yes
Check the error code, with
connected XG5000.
Write down the Troubleshooting
Questionnaires and contact the nearest
service center.
See Appendix 1 Flag list
and remove the cause of
the error.
Complete
Yes
Warning error?
Is ERR LED still
flicking ?
11-3
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.2.3 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the RUN LED turns Off.
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure to treat the lights-out of RUN LED when the power
is supplied, operation starts or operation is in the process.
RUN LED is Off.
No
Yes
Write down the Troubleshooting
Questionnaires and contact the nearest
service center.
Complete
| Turn the power unit Off and On. |
Is RUN LED Off?
11-4
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.2.4 Troubleshooting flowchart used when the I/O part doesn’t operate normally.
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure used when the I/O module doesn’t
operate normally.
When the I/O module doesn’t work normally.
| Check the status of SOL1 by XG5000. |
Is the output LED of SOL1
On?
No
| Replace the connector of the terminal block. |
| Measure the voltage of terminal in SOL1 by Tester. |
| Correct wiring. |
Yes
Is the measured value
normal?
Is the output
wiring correct?
Is the
terminal connector
appropriate?
Is it normal condition?
| Separate the external wiring than check the condition of output module. |
Is it normal condition?
Check the status of SOL1. Replace the Unit
Continue
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes No
Yes
Yes
No
No
11-5
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Continue
Are the indicator LED of the
switch 1 and 2 on?
No
Check voltage of switch 1,2
by tester
Yes
Is the measured value
normal?
| Separate the external wiring witch then check the status by forced input |
Is the measured value
normal?
Check the status of the switch 1
and 2.
Input unit replacement
is Needed.
Check voltage of switch 1,2
by tester
Is the measured value
normal?
Is the
terminal screw tighten
securely?
Is input wiring correct?
| Correct wiring |
Retighten the terminal
screw.
| Replace the terminal board connector. |
Input unit replacement is
Check from the beginning. Needed.
Is the condition
of the terminal board connector
appropriate?
Yes
No
No
| Yes |
| N |
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
| No |
11-6
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
| 11.3 Troubleshooting Questionnaire |
When problems have been met during operation of the XGC series, please write down this Questionnaires and
contact the service center via telephone or facsimile.
For errors relating to special or communication modules, use the questionnaire included in the User’s manual
of the unit.
1. Telephone & FAX No
| Tell) 2. Using equipment model: |
FAX) |
3. Details of using equipment
| CPU model: ( | ) | OS version No.:( | ) | Serial No.( | ) |
| XG5000 (for program compile) version No.: ( | ) |
4.General description of the device or system used as the control object:
5. The kind of the base unit:
- Operation by the mode setting switch ( ),
- Operation by the XG5000 or communications ( ),
- External memory module operation ( ),
6. Is the ERR. LED of the CPU module turned On ? Yes( ), No( )
7. XG5000 error message:
8. History of corrective actions for the error message in the article 7:
9. Other tried corrective actions:
10. Characteristics of the error
| Repetitive( Sometimes( |
): Periodic( | ), Related to a particular sequence( | ), Related to environment( | ) |
| ): General error interval: |
11. Detailed Description of error contents:
12. Configuration diagram for the applied system:
11-7
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
| ~ Leakage current |
|
| C AC input ~ |
Leakage current ~ |
| ~ | ~ |
| E | E1 |
| External device |
| 11.4 Troubleshooting Examples |
Possible troubles with various circuits and their corrective actions are explained.
11.4.1 Input circuit troubles and corrective actions
The followings describe possible troubles with input circuits, as well as corrective actions.
| Condition | Cause | Corrective Actions |
| Input signal doesn’t turn off. |
Leakage current of external device (Such as a drive by non-contact switch) |
Connect an appropriate register and capacity, which will make the voltage lower across the terminals of the input module. CR values are determined by the leakage current value. - Recommended value C : 0.1 ~ 0.47 ㎌ R: 47 ~ 120 Ω (1/2W) Or make up another independent display circuit. |
| Input signal doesn’t turn off. (Neon lamp may be still on) |
Leakage current of external device (Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp) |
|
| Input signal doesn’t turn off. |
Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring cable. |
Locate the power supply on the external device side as shown below. |
| Input signal doesn’t turn off. |
Leakage current of external device (Drive by switch with LED indicator) |
Connect an appropriate register, which will make the voltage higher than the OFF voltage across the input module terminal and common terminal. |
| Input signal doesn’t turn off. |
Sneak current due to the use of two different power supplies. E1 > E2, sneaked. |
Use only one power supply. Connect a sneak current prevention diode. |
R
C
External device
AC input
R
C
External device
AC input
R
AC input
External device
External device
AC input
Leakage current
DC input
L
E
DC input
L
E
DC input
R
Leakage current DC input
R
11-8
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.4.2 Output circuit and corrective actions
The following describes possible troubles with output circuits, as well as their corrective actions.
| Condition | Cause | Corrective Action |
| When the output is off, excessive voltage is applied to the load. |
Load is half-wave rectified inside (in some cases, it is true of a solenoid) When the polarity of the power supply is as shown in ① as shown in ② the line voltage are applied across D. Max. voltage is approx. 2√2. *) If a resistor is used in this way, it does not pose a problem to the output element. But it may make the performance of the diode (D), which is built in the load, drop to cause problems. |
Connect registers of tens to hundreds KΩ across the load in parallel. |
| The load doesn’t turn off. |
Leakage current by surge absorbing circuit, which is connected to output element in parallel. |
Connect C and R across the load, which are of registers of tens KΩ. When the wiring distance from the output module to the load is long, there may be a leakage current due to the line capacity. |
| When the load is C-R type timer, time constant fluctuates. |
Leakage current by surge absorbing circuit, which is connected to output element in parallel. |
Drive the relay using a contact and drive the C-R type timer using the since contact. Use other timer than the C-R contact some timers have half-ware rectified internal circuits therefore, be cautious. |
| The load does not turn off. |
Sneak current due to the use of two different power supplies. E1<E2, sneaks. E1 is off (E2 is on), sneaks. |
Use only one power supply. Connect a sneak current prevention diode. If the load is the relay, etc, connect a counter-electromotive voltage absorbing code as shown by the dot line. |
| R Load C |
~ |
| E | E1 |
| ~ | X T Timer Output ~ |
| ← ↑ ~ |
~ |
R
Load
Output
Load
E
Load
E2
Output
C
R
Load
Leakage current
Output
C
R
Load
Leakage current
Output
C
R
Load
D
C
R Load
R
D
11-9
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Output circuit troubles and corrective actions (continued).
| Condition | Cause | Corrective actions |
| The load off response time is long. |
Over current at off state [The large solenoid current fluidic load (L/R is large) such as is directly driven with the transistor output. The off response time can be delayed by one or more second as some loads make the current flow across the diode at the off time of the transistor output. |
Insert a small L/R magnetic contact and drive the load using the same contact. |
| Output transistor is destroyed. |
Surge current of the white lamp A surge current of 10 times or more when turned on. |
To suppress the surge current make the dark current of 1/3 to 1/5 rated current flow. |
Output
| E Sink type transistor output Source type transistor output E |
E1 |
| E Off current |
R
Outpu
Loa
Output
R Output
Outpu
Loa
11-10
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
| 11.5 Error Code List |
| Error code |
Error cause | (restart mode after taking an action) Action | Operation status | status LED | Diagnosis point |
| 23 | Program to execute is abnormal |
Start after reloading the program | Warning | 0. Flicker 5 second | RUN mode |
| 24 | I/O parameter error | Start after reloading I/O parameter, Battery change if battery has a problem. Check the preservation status after I/O parameter reloading and if error occurs, change the unit. |
Warning | 0.5 second Flicker |
Reset RUN mode switching |
| 25 | Basic parameter error | Start after reloading Basic parameter, Change battery if it has a problem. Check the preservation status after Basic parameter reloading and if error occurs, change the unit. |
Warning | 0.5 second Flicker |
Reset RUN mode switching |
| 30 | Module set in parameter and the installed module does not match |
modify the module or parameter and then restart. |
Warning | 0. Flicker 5 second | RUN mode switching |
| 31 | Module falling during operation or additional setup |
After checking the position of attachment/detachment of expansion module during Run mode |
Warning | 0.1 second Flicker |
Every scan |
| 33 | Data of I/O module does not access normally during operation. |
After checking the position of slot where the access error occurs by XG5000, change the module and restart (acc.to parameter.) |
Heavy error |
0.1 second Flicker |
Scan end |
| 34 | Normal access of special/link module data during operation not available |
After checking the position of slot that access error occurred by XG5000, change the module and restart (acc.to parameter). |
Heavy error |
0.1 second Flicker |
Scan end |
| 39 | Abnormal stop of CPU or malfunction |
Abnormal system end by noise or hard ware error. 1) If it occurs repeatedly when power reinput, request service center 2) Noise measures |
Heavy error |
0.1 second Flicker |
Ordinary time |
| 40 | Scan time of program during operation exceeds the scan watchdog time designated by parameter. |
After checking the scan watchdog time designated by parameter, modify the parameter or the program and then restart. |
Warning | 0.5 second Flicker |
While running the program |
| 41 | Operation error occurs while running the user program. |
Remove operation error → reload the program and restart. |
Warning | 0.5 second Flicker |
While running the program |
| 44 | Timer index user error |
After reloading a timer index program modification, start |
Warning | 0.5Flicker second | Scan end |
| 50 | Heavy error of external device |
Refer to Heavy error detection flag and modifies the device and restart. (Acc. Parameter) |
Heavy error |
1 second Flicker |
Scan end |
| 60 | E_STOP function executed |
After removing error causes which starts E_STOP function in program, power reinput |
Heavy error |
1 second Flicker |
While running the program |
11-11
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
| Error code |
Error cause | (restart mode after taking an action) Action | Operation status | status LED | Diagnosis point |
| 500 | Data memory backup not possible |
If not error in battery, power reinput Remote mode is switched to STOP mode. |
Warning | 1 second Flicker | Reset |
| 501 | Abnormal clock data | Setting the time by XG5000 if there is no error |
Warning | 0.1 second Flicker |
Ordinary time |
| 502 | Battery voltage falling | Battery change at power On status | Warning | 0.1 second Flicker |
Ordinary time |
11-12
Appendix 1 Flag List
Appendix 1 Flag List
| Appendix 1.1 Special Relay (F) List |
| Word | Bit | Variables | Function | Description |
| %FW0~1 | %FD0 | _SYS_STATE | Mode and state | Indicates PLC mode and operation State. |
| %FX0 | _RUN | Run | Run state. | |
| %FX1 | _STOP | Stop | Stop state. | |
| %FX2 | _ERROR | Error | Error state. | |
| %FX3 | _DEBUG | Debug | Debug state. | |
| %FX4 | _LOCAL_CON | Local control | Local control mode. | |
| %FX6 | _REMOTE_CON | Remote mode | Remote control mode. | |
| %FX8 | _RUN_EDIT_ST | Online editing | Editing program download during RUN. | |
| %FX9 | _RUN_EDIT_CHK | Internal edit processing during RUN. | ||
| %FX10 | _RUN_EDIT_DONE | Edit is done during RUN. | ||
| %FX11 | _RUN_EDIT_NG | Edit is ended abnormally during RUN. | ||
| %FX12 | _CMOD_KEY | Change Operation Mode | Operation mode changed by key. | |
| %FX13 | _CMOD_LPADT | Operation mode changed by local PADT. | ||
| %FX14 | _CMOD_RPADT | Operation mode changed by Remote PADT. | ||
| %FX15 | _CMOD_RLINK | Operation mode changed by Remote communication module. |
||
| %FX16 | _FORCE_IN | Forced input | Forced input state. | |
| %FX17 | _FORCE_OUT | Forced output | Forced output state. | |
| %FX20 | _MON_On | Monitor | Monitor on execution. | |
| %FX21 | _USTOP_On | Stop by STOP function | PLC stops by STOP function after finishing current scan |
|
| %FX22 | _ESTOP_On | Stop by Estop function | PLC stops by ESTOP function promptly | |
| %FX24 | _INIT_RUN | Initialize | Initialization task on execution. | |
| %FX28 | _PB1 | Program Code 1 | Program Code 1 selected. | |
| %FX29 | _PB2 | Program Code 2 | Program Code 2 selected. | |
| %FX30 | _CB1 | Compile Code 1 | Compile Code 1 selected. | |
| %FX31 | _CB2 | Compile Code2 | Compile Code 2 selected. | |
| %FW2~3 | %FD1 | _CNF_ER | System error | Reports heavy error state of system. |
| %FX33 | _IO_TYER | Module Type error | Module Type does not match. | |
| %FX34 | _IO_DEER | Module detachment error |
Module is detached. | |
| %FX36 | _IO_RWER | Module I/O error | Module I/O error. | |
| %FX37 | _IP_IFER | Module interface error | Special/communication module interface error. | |
| %FX38 | _ANNUM_ER | External device error | Detected heavy error in external Device. |
App. 1-１
Appendix 1 Flag List
| Word | Bit | Variable | Function | Description |
| %FW2~3 | %FX40 | _BPRM_ER | Basic parameter | Basic parameter error. |
| %FX41 | _IOPRM_ER | IO parameter | I/O configuration parameter error. | |
| %FX42 | _SPPRM_ER | Special module parameter | Special module parameter is Abnormal. |
|
| %FX43 | _CPPRM_ER | Communication module parameter |
Communication module parameter is abnormal. |
|
| %FX44 | _PGM_ER | Program error | There is error in Check Sum of user program | |
| %FX45 | _CODE_ER | Program code error | Meets instruction can not be interpreted | |
| %FX46 | _SWDT_ER | CPU abnormal stop Or malfunction |
The saved program is damaged because of CPU abnormal end or program can not be executed. |
|
| %FX48 | _WDT_ER | Scan watchdog | Scan watchdog operated. | |
| %FW4 | %FD2 | _CNF_WAR | System warning | Reports light error state of system. |
| %FX64 | _RTC_ER | RTC data error | RTC data Error occurred | |
| %FX65 | _DBCK_ER | Backup error | Data backup error. | |
| %FX66 | _HBCK_ER | Restart error | Hot Restart is not available | |
| %FX67 | _ABSD_ER | Operation shutdown error | Stop by abnormal operation. | |
| %FX68 | _TASK_ER | Task collision | Tasks are under collision | |
| %FX69 | _BAT_ER | Battery error | There is error in battery status | |
| %FX70 | _ANNUM_WAR | External device error | Detected light error of external device. | |
| %FX72 | _HS_WAR1 | High speed link 1 | High speed link – parameter 1 error. | |
| %FX73 | _HS_WAR2 | High speed link 2 | High speed link – parameter 2 error. | |
| %FX84 | _P2P_WAR1 | P2P parameter 1 | P2P – parameter 1 error. | |
| %FX85 | _P2P_WAR2 | P2P parameter 2 | P2P – parameter 2 error. | |
| %FX86 | _P2P_WAR3 | P2P parameter 3 | P2P – parameter 3 error. | |
| %FX92 | _CONSTANT_ER | Constant error | Constant error. | |
| %FW9 | %FW9 | _USER_F | User contact | Timer used by user. |
| %FX144 | _T20MS | 20ms | As a clock signal available at user program, it reverses On/Off every half period. Since clock signal is dealt with at the end of scan, there may be delay or distortion according to scan time. So use clock that’s longer than scan time. Clock signal is Off status at the start of scan program and task program. _T100ms clock 50ms 50ms |
|
| %FX145 | _T100MS | 100ms | ||
| %FX146 | _T200MS | 200ms | ||
| %FX147 | _T1S | 1s Clock | ||
| %FX148 | _T2S | 2 s Clock | ||
| %FX149 | _T10S | 10 s Clock | ||
| %FX150 | _T20S | 20 s Clock | ||
| %FX151 | _T60S | 60 s Clock | ||
| %FX153 | _On | Ordinary time On | Always On state Bit. | |
| %FX154 | _Off | Ordinary time Off | Always Off state Bit. | |
| %FX155 | _1On | 1scan On | First scan On Bit. | |
| %FX156 | _1Off | 1scan Off | First scan OFF bit. | |
| %FX157 | _STOG | Reversal | Reversal every scan. |
App. 1-２
Appendix 1 Flag List
| Word | Bit | Variable | Function | Description |
| %FW10 | %FW10 | _USER_CLK | User Clock | Clock available for user setting. |
| %FX160 | _USR_CLK0 | Setting scan repeat | On/Off as much as set scan Clock 0. | |
| %FX161 | _USR_CLK1 | Setting scan repeat | On/Off as much as set scan Clock 1. | |
| %FX162 | _USR_CLK2 | Setting scan repeat | On/Off as much as set scan Clock 2. | |
| %FX163 | _USR_CLK3 | Setting scan repeat | On/Off as much as set scan Clock 3. | |
| %FX164 | _USR_CLK4 | Setting scan repeat | On/Off as much as set scan Clock 4. | |
| %FX165 | _USR_CLK5 | Setting scan repeat | On/Off as much as set scan Clock 5. | |
| %FX166 | _USR_CLK6 | Setting scan repeat | On/Off as much as set scan Clock 6. | |
| %FX167 | _USR_CLK7 | Setting scan repeat | On/Off as much as set scan Clock 7. | |
| %FW11 | %FW11 | _LOGIC_RESULT | Logic result | Indicates logic results. |
| %FX176 | _ERR | operation error | On during 1 scan in case of operation error. | |
| %FX181 | _LER | Operation error latch | Continuously On in case of operation error | |
| %FW14 | - | _FALS_NUM | FALS no. | Indicates FALS no. |
| %FW15 | - | _PUTGET_ERR0 | PUT/GET error 0 | Main base Put / Get error. |
| %FW23 | - | _PUTGET_NDR0 | PUT/GET end 0 | Main base Put/Get end. |
| %FW44 | - | _CPU_TYPE | CPU Type | Indicates information for CPU Type. |
| %FW45 | - | _CPU_VER | CPU version | Indicates CPU version. |
| %FD23 | - | _OS_VER | OS version | Indicates OS version. |
| %FD24 | - | _OS_DATE | OS date | Indicates OS distribution date. |
| %FW50 | - | _SCAN_MAX | Max. scan time | Indicates max. scan time. |
| %FW51 | - | _SCAN_MIN | Min. scan time | Indicates min. scan time. |
| %FW52 | - | _SCAN_CUR | Current scan time | Current scan time. |
| %FW53 | - | _MON_YEAR | Month/year | Clock data (month/year) |
| %FW54 | - | _TIME_DAY | Hour/date | Clock data (hour/date) |
| %FW55 | - | _SEC_MIN | Second/minute | Clock data (Second/minute) |
| %FW56 | - | _HUND_WK | Hundred year/week | Clock data (Hundred year/week) |
| %FD30 | - | _REF_COUNT | Refresh count | Increase when module Refresh. |
| %FD31 | - | _REF_OK_CNT | Refresh OK | Increase when module Refresh is normal. |
| %FD32 | - | _REF_NG_CNT | Refresh NG | Increase when module Refresh is Abnormal. |
| %FD33 | - | _REF_LIM_CNT | Refresh Limit | Increase when module Refresh is abnormal (Time Out). |
| %FD34 | - | _REF_ERR_CNT | Refresh Error | Increase when module Refresh is Abnormal. |
| %FD40 | - | _BUF_FULL_CNT | Buffer Full | Increase when CPU internal buffer is full. |
| %FD41 | - | _PUT_CNT | Put count | Increase when Put count. |
| %FD42 | - | _GET_CNT | Get count | Increase when Get count. |
| %FD43 | - | _KEY | Current key | indicates the current state of local key. |
| %FD44 | - | _KEY_PREV | Previous key | indicates the previous state of local key |
App. 1-３
Appendix 1 Flag List
| Word | Bit | Variable | Function | Description |
| %FW90 | - | _IO_TYER_N | Mismatch slot | Module Type mismatched slot no. |
| %FW91 | - | _IO_DEER_N | Detach slot | Module detached slot no. |
| %FW93 | - | _IO_RWER_N | RW error slot | Module read/write error slot no. |
| %FW95 | - | _IP_IFER_N | IF error slot | Module interface error slot no. |
| %FW96 | - | _IO_TYER0 | Module Type 0 error | Main base module Type error. |
| %FW104 | - | _IO_DEER0 | Module Detach 0 error | Main base module Detach error. |
| %FW120 | - | _IO_RWER0 | Module RW 0 error | Main base module read/write error. |
| %FW128 | - | _IO_IFER_0 | Module IF 0 error | Main base module interface error. |
| %FD69 | _RTC_TOD | Current time of RTC (unit: ms) |
As time data based on 00:00:00 within one day, unit is ms |
|
| %FD70 | - | _AC_FAIL_CNT | Power shutdown times | Saves the times of power shutdown. |
| %FD71 | - | _ERR_HIS_CNT | Error occur times | Saves the times of error occur. |
| %FD72 | - | _MOD_HIS_CNT | Mode conversion times | Saves the times of mode conversion. |
| %FD73 | - | _SYS_HIS_CNT | History occur times | Saves the times of system history. |
| %FD74 | - | _LOG_ROTATE | Log Rotate | Saves log rotate information. |
| %FW150 | - | _BASE_INFO0 | Slot information 0 | Main base slot information. |
| %FW158 | _RBANK_NUM | Currently used block No. | Indicates currently used block no. | |
| %FW159 | _RBLOCK_STATE | Currently used block status | Indicates Currently used block status (Read/Write/Error) |
|
| %FD80 | _RBLOCK_RD_FLAG | Read flash N block | When reading data of flash N block, Nth bit is on. | |
| %FD81 | _RBLOCK_WR_FLAG | Write flash N block | When writing data of flash N block, Nth bit is on. | |
| %FD82 | _RBLOCK_ER_FLAG | Flash N block error | When error occurs during flash N block service, Nth bit is on. |
|
| %FW200 | - | _USER_WRITE_F | Available contact point | Contact point available in program. |
| %FX3200 | _RTC_WR | RTC RW | Data write and read in RTC. | |
| %FX3201 | _SCAN_WR | Scan WR | Initializing the value of scan. | |
| %FX3202 | _CHK_ANC_ERR | Request detection of external serious error |
Request detection of external error. | |
| %FX3216 | _CHK_ANC_WAR | Request detection of external slight error (warning) |
Request detection of external slight error (warning). |
|
| %FW201 | - | _USER_STAUS_F | User contact point | User contact point. |
| %FX3216 | _INIT_DONE | Initialization completed | Initialization complete displayed. | |
| %FW202 | - | _ANC_ERR | Display information of external serious error |
Display information of external serious error |
| %FW203 | - | _ANC_WAR | Display information of external slight error (warning) |
Display information of external slight error (warning) |
| %FW210 | - | _MON_YEAR_DT | Month/year | Clock data (month/year) |
| %FW211 | - | _TIME_DAY_DT | Hour/date | Clock data (hour/date) |
| %FW212 | - | _SEC_MIN_DT | Second/minute | Clock data (Second/minute) |
| %FW213 | - | _HUND_WK_DT | Hundred year/week | Clock data (Hundred year/week) |
| %FW272 | %FX4352 | _ARY_IDX_ERR | Array –index- range exceeded- error flag |
Error flag is indicated when exceeding the no. of array |
| %FW274 | %FX4384 | _ARY_IDX_LER | Array –index- range exceeded- latch-error flag |
Error latch flag is indicated when exceeding the no. of array |
App. 1-４
Appendix 1 Flag List
| Appendix 1.2 Communication Relay (L) List |
Here describes data link communication relay(L).
(1) High-speed Link 1
| Device | Keyword | Type | Description |
| %LX0 | _HS1_RLINK | Bit | High speed link parameter 1 normal operation of all station |
| Indicates normal operation of all station according to parameter set in High speed link, and On under the condition as below. 1. In case that all station set in parameter is RUN mode and no error, 2. All data block set in parameter is communicated normally, and 3. The parameter set in each station itself is communicated normally. Once RUN_LINK is On, it keeps On unless stopped by LINK_DISABLE. |
|||
| %LX1 | _HS1_LTRBL | Bit | Abnormal state after _HS1RLINK On |
| In the state of _HSmRLINK flag On, if communication state of the station set in the parameter and data block is as follows, this flag shall be On. 1. In case that the station set in the parameter is not RUN mode, or 2. There is an error in the station set in the parameter, or 3. The communication state of data block set in the parameter is not good. LINK TROUBLE shall be On if the above 1, 2 & 3 conditions occur, and if the condition return to the normal state, it shall be OFF again. |
|||
| %LX32 ~ %LX95 |
_HS1_STATE*** (*** = 000~063) |
Bit Array |
Indicates total status of High Speed Link no.1 ***th block |
| Indicates total status of communication information about each data block of parameter _HS1_STATE*** = HS1MOD*** &_HS1TRX*** &(~_HS1_ERR***) |
|||
| %LX96 ~ %LX159 |
_HS1_MOD*** (*** = 000~063) |
Bit Array |
RUN operation mode of High Speed Link parameter no.1 ***th block station |
| Indicates operation mode of station set in *** data block of parameter | |||
| %LX160 ~ %LX223 |
_HS1_TRX*** (*** = 000~063) |
Bit Array |
Indicates normal communication with High Speed Link no.1 ***th block station |
| Indicates whether communication status of *** data block of parameter is normal or not. |
|||
| %LX224 ~ %LX287 |
_HS1_ERR*** (*** = 000~063) |
Bit Array |
Operation error mode of High Speed Link parameter no.1 ***th block station |
| Indicates whether there is error at communication status of *** data block of parameter |
|||
| %LX288 ~ %LX767 |
_HS1_SETBLOCK*** | Bit Array | Indicates High Speed Link parameter no.1 ***th block setting |
| Indicates whether *** data block of parameter is set or not. |
App. 1-５
Appendix 1 Flag List
(2) High-speed Link2
| Device | Keyword | Type | Description |
| %LX416 | _HS2_RLINK | Bit | High-speed link parameter 2 normal operation of all station. |
| Indicates normal operation of all station according to parameter set in High speed link and On under the condition as below. 1. In case that all station set in parameter is Run mode and no error 2. All data block set in parameter is communicated and 3.The parameter set in each station itself is communicated normally. Once RUN_LINK is On, it keeps On unless stopped by LINK_DISABLE. |
|||
| %LX417 | _HS2_LTRBL | Bit | Abnormal state after _HS2RLINK On. |
| In the state of _HSmRLINK flag On, if communication state of the station set in the parameter and data block is as follows, this flag shall be On. 1. In case that the station set in the parameter is not RUN mode, or 2. There is an error in the station set in the parameter, or 3. The communication state of data block set in the parameter is not good. LINK TROUBLE shall be On if the above 1, 2 & 3 conditions occur, and if the condition return to the normal state, it shall be OFF again. |
|||
| %LX448 ~ %LX511 |
_HS2_STATE*** (*** = 000~063) |
Bit Array |
Indicates total status of High Speed Link no.1 ***th block |
| Indicates total status of communication information about each data block of parameter _HS2_STATE*** = HS2MOD***&_HS2TRX***&(~_HS2_ERR***) |
|||
| %LX512 ~ %LX575 |
_HS2_MOD*** (*** = 000~063) |
Bit Array |
RUN operation mode of High Speed Link parameter no.1 ***th block station |
| Indicates operation mode of station set in *** data block of parameter | |||
| %LX576 ~ %LX639 |
_HS2_TRX*** (*** = 000~063) |
Bit Array |
Indicates normal communication with High Speed Link no.1 ***th block station |
| Indicates whether communication status of *** data block of parameter is normal or not. |
|||
| %LX640 ~ %LX703 |
_HS2_ERR*** (*** = 000~063) |
Bit Array |
Operation error mode of High Speed Link parameter no.1 ***th block station |
| Indicates whether there is error at communication status of *** data block of parameter |
|||
| %LX704 ~ %LX767 |
_HS2_SETBLOCK*** | Bit Array | Indicates High Speed Link parameter no.1 ***th block setting |
| Indicates whether *** data block of parameter is set or not. |
App. 1-６
Appendix 1 Flag List
(3) Common area
Communication flag list according to P2P service setting.
P2P parameter: 1~3, P2P block: 0~31
| Device | Keyword | Type | Description |
| %LX8192 | _P2P1_NDR00 | Bit | Indicates P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service normal end. |
| %LX8193 | _P2P1_ERR00 | Bit | Indicates P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service abnormal end. |
| %LW513 | _P2P1_STATUS00 | Word | Indicates error code in case of P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service abnormal end. |
| %LD257 | _P2P1_SVCCNT00 | DWord | Indicates P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service normal count. |
| %LD261 | _P2P1_ERRCNT00 | DWord | Indicates P2P parameter 1, 0 Block service abnormal count. |
| %LX8288 | _P2P1_NDR01 | Bit | P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service normal end. |
| %LX8289 | _P2P1_ERR01 | Bit | P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service abnormal end. |
| %LW519 | _P2P1_STATUS01 | Word | Indicates error code in case of P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service abnormal end. |
| %LD260 | _P2P1_SVCCNT01 | DWord | Indicates P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service normal count. |
| %LD264 | _P2P1_ERRCNT01 | DWord | Indicates P2P parameter 1, 1 Block service abnormal count. |
| %LW524~%LW529 | - | Word | P2P parameter 1,2 Block service total. |
| %LW530~%LW535 | - | Word | P2P parameter 1,3 Block service total. |
| %LW536~%LW697 | - | Word | P2P parameter 1,4~30 Block service total. |
| %LW698~%LW703 | - | Word | P2P parameter 1,31 Block service total. |
App. 1-７
Appendix 1 Flag List
| Appendix 1.3 Network Register (N) List |
Here describes Network Register for communication (N). P2P parameter: 1~3, P2P block: 0~31
| Device | Keyword | Type | Description |
| %NW000 | _P1B00SN | Word | Saves another station no. of P2P parameter 1, 00 block. |
| %NW0000~0004 | _P1B00RD1 | Word | Saves area device 1 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW005 | _P1B00RS1 | Word | Saves area size 1 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0006~0009 | _P1B00RD2 | Word | Saves area device 2 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW010 | _P1B00RS2 | Word | Saves area size 2 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0011~0014 | _P1B00RD3 | Word | Saves area device 3 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW015 | _P1B00RS3 | Word | Saves area size 3 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0016~0019 | _P1B00RD4 | Word | Saves area device 4 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW020 | _P1B00RS4 | Word | Saves area size 4 to read P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0021~0024 | _P1B00WD1 | Word | Saves area device 1 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW025 | _P1B00WS1 | Word | Saves area size 1 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0026~0029 | _P1B00WD2 | Word | Saves area device 2 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW030 | _P1B00WS2 | Word | Saves area size 2 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0031~0034 | _P1B00WD3 | Word | Saves area device 3 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW035 | _P1B00WS3 | Word | Saves area size 3 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0036~0039 | _P1B00WD4 | Word | Saves area device 4 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW040 | _P1B00WS4 | Word | Saves area size 4 to save P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0041~0081 | - | Word | Saving area of P2P parameter 1, 01 block. |
| %NW0082~0122 | - | Word | Saving area of P2P parameter 1, 02 block. P2P |
| %NW0123~1311 | - | Word | Saving area of P2P parameter 1, 03~31 block. |
| %NW1312~2623 | - | Word | Saving area of P2P parameter 2. |
| %NW2624~3935 | - | Word | Saving area of P2P parameter 3. |
| Remark |
| In XGB series, Network register is available only monitoring. (Read Only) |
App. 1-８
Appendix 2 Dimension
Appendix 2 Dimension (Unit: mm)
(1) Compact type main unit (IEC language)
-. XEC-DN32H(/DC)
-. XEC-DP32H
App.2 -１
Appendix 2 Dimension
-. XEC-DR32H(/D1)
App.2 -２
Appendix 2 Dimension
-. XEC-DN64H
-. XEC-DP64H
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
App.2 -３
Appendix 2 Dimension
-. XEC-DR64H(/D1)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
App.2 -４
Appendix 2 Dimension
(2) Extension I/O module
-. XBE-DC32A, XBE-TN32A, XBE-TP32A
| 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 19 20 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 B A |
-. XBE-RY16A
App.2 -５
Appendix 2 Dimension
-. XBE-DC08A, XBE-DC16A, XBE-DC16B, XBE-TN08A, XBE-TP08A, XBE-TN16A, XBE-TP16A
-. XBE-DR16A, XBE-RY08A, XBE-RY08B
App.2 -６
Appendix 3 Compatibility with
Appendix 3 Compatibility with GLOFA
Appendix 3.1 Compatibility of Flag
| Classification | GM7 | XEC | Type | Contents | Description |
| User Flag |
_LER | _LER | BOOL | Operation error Latch flag | Operation error latch flag which is on the basis of program block (PB), the error indication which occurs while program block running keeps until the program ends. It is available to delete by a program. |
| _ERR | _ERR | BOOL | Operation error flag | Operation error flag which is on the basis of operation function(FN) or function block(FB), it is renewed every time operation works. |
|
| _T20MS | _T20MS | BOOL | 20ms clock | Clock signal used in user program reverses On/Off per a half cycle Please use more enough long clock signal than PLC scan time. Clock signal starts from Off condition when initialization program starts or scan program starts. |
|
| _T100MS | _T100MS | BOOL | 100ms clock | As a clock signal available at user program, it reverses On/Off every half period. Since clock signal is dealt with at the end of scan, there may be delay or distortion according to scan time. So use clock that’s longer than scan time. Clock signal is Off status at the start of scan program and task program. |
|
| _T200MS | _T200MS | BOOL | 200ms clock | ||
| _T1S | _T1S | BOOL | 1second clock | ||
| _T2S | _T2S | BOOL | 2second clock | ||
| _T10S | _T10S | BOOL | 10second clock | ||
| _T20S | _T20S | BOOL | 20second clock | ||
| _T60S | _T60S | BOOL | 60second clock | ||
| _ON | _ON | BOOL | Ordinary time On | Always On state flag, used when writing a user program. | |
| _OFF | _OFF | BOOL | Ordinary time Off | Always Off state flag, used when writing a user program. | |
| _1ON | _1ON | BOOL | 1’st scan On | First scan On flag, operated after starting the operation. | |
| _1OFF | _1OFF | BOOL | 1’st scan Off | First scan Off flag, operated after starting the operation. | |
| _STOG | _STOG | BOOL | Reversal every scan (scan toggle) |
On/Off reversed per scan when user program is working. (On state for first scan) |
|
| _INIT_DONE | _INIT_DONE | BOOL | Complete of initial program |
When this flag is set by user-written initialization program, scan program starts operation after initialization program ends. |
|
| _RTC_DATE | _RTC_DATE | DATE | Current date of RTC | Indicates day data on the basis of 1.Jan.1984. | |
| _RTC_TOD | _RTC_TOD | TOD | Current time of RTC | Indicates a data for the time of the day on the basis of 00:00:00 (unit: ms) |
|
| _RTC_WEEK | _RTC_WEEK | UINT | Current a day of the week of RTC |
XGT - 0:Sun, 1:Mon, 2:Tue, 3:Wed, 4:Thu, 5:Fri, 6:Sat GLOFA - 0:Mon, 1:Tue, 2:Wed, 3:Thu, 4:Fri, 5:Sat, 6:Sun |
App. 3-1
Appendix 3 Compatibility with
| Classification | GM7 | XEC | Type | Contents | Description |
| System Error Rep. flag |
_CNF_ER | - | WORD | System error (heavy fault) |
Handles error flags about fault of operation stop as below. |
| _CPU_ER | - | BOOL | CPU Configuration error | Error flag occurred when normal operation cannot be done due to diagnosis error of CPU Module. (Refer to “_SYS_ERR” for more error contents) |
|
| _IO_TYER | _IO_TYER | BOOL | Mismatched module type error |
Representative flag displayed when I/O configuration parameter for each slot is not matched with practical module configuration or a specific module is applied in the wrong location. (Refer to “_IO_TYER_N, _IO_TYER[n]”) |
|
| _IO_DEER | _IO_DEER | BOOL | Module detachment error | Representative flag displayed when the module configuration for each slot is changed while running. (Refer to “_IO_DEER_N, _IO_DEER[n]”) |
|
| _FUSE_ER | - | BOOL | Fuse error | Representative flag displayed when the fuse of module is cut off. (Refer to “_FUSE_ER_N, _FUSE_ER[n]”) |
|
| _IO_RWER | _IO_RWER | BOOL | I/O module reading/writing error(fault) |
Representative flag displayed when it cannot normally read and write I/O module of each slot module. (Refer to “_IP_RWER_N, _IO_RWER[n]”) |
|
| _SP_IFER | _IP_IFER | BOOL | Special/communication module interface error(fault) |
Representative flag displayed when it is impossible to interface normally due to failure to initialize special/communication module or abnormal operation of these modules. (Refer to “_IP_IFER_N, _IP_IFER[n]”) |
|
| _ANNUN_ER | - | BOOL | Heavy fault detection error in external device |
Representative flag displayed when heavy error detected by user program is recorded in “_ANC_ERR[n]” . |
|
| _WD_ER | _WDT_ER | BOOL | Scan watchdog error | Indicates that the program scan time exceeds the scan watchdog time specified by a parameter. |
|
| _CODE_ER | _CODE_ER | BOOL | Program code error | Indicates that while user program is running, the program code can’t be interpreted. |
|
| _STACK_ER | - | BOOL | Stack overflow error | Indicates that while program running, stack of program exceeds normal limits. |
|
| _P_BCK_ER | _PGM_ER | BOOL | Program error | Indicates that program memory is destroyed or program cannot operate normally. ( Refer to “_DOMAIN_ST” ) |
|
| Fault Mask flag |
_CNF_ER_M | - | BYTE | System error clear (heavy fault) |
Handles error flags about error clear as below. |
| _ANNLN_ER_M | - | BOOL | Error clear | Detects heavy fault of external device. When “_ANNLN_ER” occurs, if it is operated to ignore it, this flag is set |
App. 3-2
Appendix 3 Compatibility with
| Classification | GM7 | XEC | Type | Contents | Description |
| System warning Rep. Flag |
_CNF_WAR | _CNF_WAR | WORD | System warning (light fault) |
Handles warning flag about continuation operation as below |
| _RTC_ERR | _RTC_ERR | BOOL | RTC data error | Indicates that RTC data is abnormal. | |
| _D_BCK_ER | _D_BCK_ER | BOOL | Data backup error | Indicates that cold restart starts operation instead of hot or warm restart program, since data memory is destroyed by backup error. It is possible to use in the initialization program and it is reset automatically after completing the initialization program. |
|
| _H_BCK_ER | _H_BCK_ER | BOOL | Hot restart disabled error |
Indicates that restart operation(warm or cold) is done according to a parameter, instead of hot restart operation, since it exceeds hot restart time during power recovery or the operation data (required for hot restart operation) is not backup normally. It is possible to use in the initialization program and it is reset automatically after completing the initialization program. |
|
| _AB_SD_ER | _AB_SD_ER | BOOL | Abnormal Shutdown |
This flag is used by initial program, and is reset automatically after initial program completion It is included to program stopping by ‘ESTOP’ function |
|
| _TASK_ERR | _TASK_ERR | BOOL | Task collision (Fixed cycle, external task) |
Indicates that an identical task operates in duplicate. ( please refer to “_TC_BMAP[n]”, “_TC_CNT[n]” ) |
|
| _BAT_ERR | _BAT_ERR | BOOL | Battery error | Indicates that when battery voltage for backup of user program and data memory is below the standard. |
|
| _ANNUN_WR | _ANNUN_WR | BOOL | Light fault detection of external device |
Representative flag displayed when light fault detected by user program is recorded in “_ANC_WB[n]” |
|
| _HSPMT1_ER | - | BOOL | High speed link parameter 1 error |
When high speed link enables, if it is abnormal to high speed link parameter, Indicates that high speed link can’t be executed. This flag is reset when high speed link disables. |
|
| _HSPMT2_ER | - | BOOL | High speed link parameter 2 error |
||
| _HSPMT3_ER | - | BOOL | High speed link parameter 3 error |
||
| _HSPMT4_ER | - | BOOL | High speed link parameter 4 error |
App. 3-3
Appendix 3 Compatibility with
| Classification | GM7 | XEC | Type | Contents | Description |
| System error and warning detailed flag |
_IO_TYER_N | _IO_TYER_N | UINT | Mismatched module type slot number |
When I/O configuration parameter for each slot is not matched with practical module configuration or a specific module is applied in the wrong location, it is displayed as the lowest slot number after detecting these mismatch error in slot locations. |
| _IO_TYERR[n] | _IO_TYER0 | BYTE | Mismatched module type location |
When I/O configuration parameter for each slot is not matched with practical module configuration or a specific module is applied in the wrong location, it displays the detected slot location on Bit-map. |
|
| _IO_DEER_N | _IO_DEER_N | UINT | Module detachment slot number |
When slot module configuration is changed while PLC running, it is displayed as the lowest slot number after detecting these detachment error in slot locations. |
|
| _IO_DEERR[n] | _IO_DEER0 | BYTE | Module detachment location |
When slot module configuration is changed while PLC running, it displays the detected slot location on bit-map. |
|
| _IO_RWER_N | _IO_RWER_N | UINT | I/O module reading / writing error slot number |
When it is not possible to read/write the I/O module each slot modules, it is displayed as the lowest slot number after detecting this error in slot locations. |
|
| _IO_RWERR[n] | _IO_RWER0 | BYTE | I/O module reading / writing error slot location |
When it is not possible to read/write the I/O module each slot modules, it displays the detected slot location on bit-map. |
|
| _SP_IFER_N | _IP_IFER_N | UINT | Special / link module interface error slot number |
When it is not possible to initialize special/link module of each slot module or to interface normally due to module malfunction, it is displayed as the lowest slot number after detecting this error in slot locations. |
|
| _SP_IFERR[n] | _IP_IFER_0 | BYTE | Special / link module interface error slot location |
When it is not possible to initialize special/link module of each slot module or to interface normally due to module malfunction, it displays the detected slot location on bit-map. |
|
| _ANC_ERR[n] | - | UINT | Heavy fault detection of external device |
Heavy fault of external device is detected by user program, and that error is saved at this zone as numbers which can identify 16 error types. (“0”value is not available.) |
|
| _ANC_WAR[n] | - | UINT | Light fault detection of external device |
When detecting “_ANC_WB[n]” warning by user program, the bit location of the occurred error from “_ANC_WAR[0]” is displayed as an integer in occurrence order. |
App. 3-4
Appendix 3 Compatibility with
| Classification | GM7 | XEC | Type | Contents | Description |
| System error and warning detailed flag |
_ANC_WB[n] | - | BIT | Light fault detection bit-map of external device |
Light fault of external device (detected by user program) is saved on bit-map. (“0”value is not available.) |
| _TC_BMAP[n] | - | BIT | Task Collision Bit map |
Displayed on bit-map when same task is operating or is ready for operation. |
|
| _TC_CNT[n] | - | UINT | Task Collision Counter |
Displays task collision counter when task collision occurs while user program execution |
|
| _BAT_ER_TM | - | DATE & TIME | Battery voltage drop time |
Displays first battery voltage drop time. It is reset when it returns to normal condition. |
|
| _AC_F_CNT | _AC_FAIL_CNT | UINT | Instant power cutoff count occurred |
Indicates the instant power cutoff count which occurred while RUN mode operation. |
|
| _AC_F_TM[n] | - | DATE & TIME | Instant power cutoff history |
Saves instant power cutoff date/time, which can be saved up to 16 from the most recent event. |
|
| _ERR_HIS[n] | - | - | Error occurrence history |
Error occurrence time and error code are saved up to 16 from the most recent event. . Stop-time : DATE&TIME (8 Byte) . Error code : UINT (2 Byte) |
|
| _MODE_HIS[n] | - | - | Change history of RUN mode |
Run mode change time, run mode and restart mode are saved up to 16 from the most recent event. . Change time : DATE&TIME (8 Byte) . Run mode : UINT (2 Byte) . Restart : UINT (2 Byte) |
App. 3-5
Appendix 3 Compatibility with
| Classification | GM7 | XEC | Type | Contents | Description |
| System operation state flag |
_CPU_TYPE | _CPU_TYPE | UINT | CPU type information |
Indicates the type information of PLC CPU |
| _VER_NUM | _OS_VER | UINT | OS Version Number |
OS version number of PLC CPU | |
| _MEM_TYPE | - | UINT | Memory module type |
Program memory module type (0:unmounted, 1~5:Type) |
|
| _SYS_STATE | - | WORD | PLC mode and running state |
Indicates operation mode and operation state of the system. |
|
| _LOCAL_CON | Local control | Indicates that operation mode can be changed by mode key or PADT only |
|||
| _STOP | STOP | Indicates running state of CPU module. | |||
| _RUN | RUN | ||||
| _PAUSE- | PAUSE | ||||
| _DEBUG | DEBUG | ||||
| _CMOD_KEY | Running mode change factor |
Change the running mode by key | |||
| _CMOD_LPADT | Running mode change factor |
Change the running mode by PADT | |||
| _CMOD_RPADT | Running mode change factor |
Change the running mode by remote PADT | |||
| _CMOD_RLINK | Running mode change factor |
Change the running mode by communication | |||
| _USTOP_ON | Stopped by STOP function |
While RUN mode operation, stopped after scan completion by STOP function |
|||
| _FORCE_IN | Forced input | Indicates that a forced On/Off for the input contact is running. |
|||
| _FORCE_OUT | Forced output | Indicates that a forced On/Off for the output contact is running. |
|||
| _ESTOP_ON | Stopped by ESTOP function |
While RUN mode operation, stopped immediately by ESTOP function |
|||
| _REMOTE_CON | Remote mode On |
Indicates that it is operated by remote mode. |
App. 3-6
Appendix 3 Compatibility with
| Classification | GM7 | XEC | Type | Contents | Description |
| System operation state flag |
_PADT_CNF | - | BYTE | GMWIN connection state |
Indicates the connection state of CPU module and PADT |
| - | Local GMWIN connection |
Bit indicated connection state of local PADT | |||
| - | Remote GMWIN connection |
Bit indicated connection state of remote PADT | |||
| - | Remote communication connection |
Bit indicated connection state of remote communication |
|||
| _RST_TY | - | BYTE | Restart mode information |
- | |
| - | Cold restart | ||||
| - | Warm restart | ||||
| - | Hot restart | ||||
| _INIT_RUN | _INIT_RUN | BOOL | Initialization is running |
Indicates that user-written initialization program is running. |
|
| _SCAN_MAX | _SCAN_MAX | UINT | Max. Scan Time (ms) |
Indicates Max. scan time while running. | |
| _SCAN_MIN | _SCAN_MIN | UINT | Min. Scan Time(ms) |
Indicates Min. scan time while running. | |
| _SCAN_CUR | _SCAN_CUR | UINT | Current Scan Time(ms) |
Indicates current scan time data which is being renewed. |
|
| _RTC_TIME[n] | _RTC_DATE _RTC_WEEK _RTC_TOD |
BYTE | Current time | The current BCD data of RTC (1.Jan.1984 ~ 31.Dec.2083) _RTC_TIME[0] : year, _RTC_TIME[1] : month, _RTC_TIME[2] : day, _RTC_TIME[3] : time, _RTC_TIME[4] : minute, _RTC_TIME[5] : second _RTC_TIME[6] : day of the week, _RTC_TIME[7] : not used day of the week XGT - 0:Sun, 1:Mon, 2:Tue, 3:Wed, 4:Thu, 5:Fri, 6:Sat GLOFA - 0:Mon, 1:Tue, 2:Wed, 3:Thu, 4:Fri, 5:Sat, 6:Sun |
|
| _SYS_ERR | - | UINT | Error type | - |
App. 3-7
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4 Instruction List
It’s a list of function and function block. For each function and function block, please refer to XGI/XGR/XEC
Insturction user manual.
Appendix 4.1 Basic Function
Appendix 4.1.1 Type Conversion Function
It converts each input data type into an output data type.
| Function Group | Function | Input data type | Output data type | Remarks |
| ARY_ASC_TO_*** | ARY_ASC_TO_BYTE | WORD(ASCII) | BYTE | |
| ARY_ASC_TO_BCD | WORD(ASCII) | BYTE(BCD) | ||
| ARY_BYTE_TO_* ** |
ARY_BYTE_TO_ASC | BYTE | WORD(ASCII) | |
| ARY_BCD_TO_*** | ARY_BCD_TO_ ASC | BYTE(BCD) | WORD(ASCII) | |
| ASC_TO_*** | ASC_TO_BCD | BYTE(BCD) | USINT | |
| ASC_TO_BYTE | WORD(BCD) | UINT | ||
| BCD_TO_*** | BYTE_BCD_TO_SINT | BYTE(BCD) | SINT | |
| WORD_BCD_TO_INT | WORD(BCD) | INT | ||
| DWORD_BCD_TO_DINT | DWORD(BCD) | DINT | ||
| LWORD_BCD_TO_LINT | LWORD(BCD) | LINT | ||
| BYTE_BCD_TO_USINT | BYTE(BCD) | USINT | ||
| WORD_BCD_TO_UINT | WORD(BCD) | UINT | ||
| DWORD_BCD_TO_UDINT | DWORD(BCD) | UDINT | ||
| LWORD_BCD_TO_ULINT | LWORD(BCD) | ULINT | ||
| BCD_TO_ASC | BCD_TO_ASC | BYTE(BCD) | WORD | |
| BYTE_TO_ASC | BYTE_TO_ASC | BYTE | ASC(BYTE) | |
| TRUNC | TRUNC_REAL | REAL | DINT | |
| TRUNC_LREAL | LREAL | LINT | ||
| REAL_TO_*** | REAL_TO_SINT | REAL | SINT | |
| REAL_TO_INT | REAL | INT | ||
| REAL_TO_DINT | REAL | DINT | ||
| REAL_TO_LINT | REAL | LINT | ||
| REAL_TO_USINT | REAL | USINT | ||
| REAL_TO_UINT | REAL | UINT | ||
| REAL_TO_UDINT | REAL | UDINT | ||
| REAL_TO_ULINT | REAL | ULINT | ||
| REAL_TO_DWORD | REAL | DWORD | ||
| REAL_TO_LREAL | REAL | LREAL | ||
| REAL_TO_STRING | REAL | STRING | ||
| LREAL_TO_*** | LREAL_TO_SINT | LREAL | SINT | |
| LREAL_TO_INT | LREAL | INT | ||
| LREAL_TO_DINT | LREAL | DINT | ||
| LREAL_TO_LINT | LREAL | LINT | ||
| LREAL_TO_USINT | LREAL | USINT | ||
| LREAL_TO_*** | LREAL_TO_UINT | LREAL | UINT | |
| LREAL_TO_UDINT | LREAL | UDINT | ||
| LREAL_TO_ULINT | LREAL | ULINT | ||
| LREAL_TO_LWORD | LREAL | LWORD | ||
| LREAL_TO_REAL | LREAL | REAL | ||
| LREAL_TO_STRING | LREAL | STRING | ||
| SINT_TO_*** | SINT_TO_INT | SINT | INT | |
| SINT_TO_DINT | SINT | DINT | ||
| SINT_TO_LINT | SINT | LINT | ||
| SINT_TO_USINT | SINT | USINT | ||
| SINT_TO_UINT | SINT | UINT |
App.4 - 1
Appendix 4 Insturction List
| Function Group | Function | Input data type | Output data type | Remarks |
| SINT_TO_UDINT | SINT | UDINT | ||
| SINT_TO_ULINT | SINT | ULINT | ||
| SINT_TO_BOOL | SINT | BOOL | ||
| SINT_TO_BYTE | SINT | BYTE | ||
| SINT_TO_WORD | SINT | WORD | ||
| SINT_TO_DWORD | SINT | DWORD | ||
| SINT_TO_LWORD | SINT | LWORD | ||
| SINT_TO_REAL | SINT | REAL | ||
| SINT_TO_LREAL | SINT | LREAL | ||
| SINT_TO_STRING | SINT | STRING | ||
| INT_TO_*** | INT_TO_SINT | INT | SINT | |
| INT_TO_DINT | INT | DINT | ||
| INT_TO_LINT | INT | LINT | ||
| INT_TO_USINT | INT | USINT | ||
| INT_TO_UINT | INT | UINT | ||
| INT_TO_UDINT | INT | UDINT | ||
| INT_TO_ULINT | INT | ULINT | ||
| INT_TO_BOOL | INT | BOOL | ||
| INT_TO_BYTE | INT | BYTE | ||
| INT_TO_WORD | INT | WORD | ||
| INT_TO_DWORD | INT | DWORD | ||
| INT_TO_LWORD | INT | LWORD | ||
| INT_TO_REAL | INT | REAL | ||
| INT_TO_LREAL | INT | LREAL | ||
| INT_TO_STRING | INT | STRING | ||
| DINT_TO_*** | DINT_TO_SINT | DINT | SINT | |
| DINT_TO_INT | DINT | INT | ||
| DINT_TO_LINT | DINT | LINT | ||
| DINT_TO_USINT | DINT | USINT | ||
| DINT_TO_UINT | DINT | UINT | ||
| DINT_TO_UDINT | DINT | UDINT | ||
| DINT_TO_ULINT | DINT | ULINT | ||
| DINT_TO_BOOL | DINT | BOOL | ||
| DINT_TO_BYTE | DINT | BYTE | ||
| DINT_TO_WORD | DINT | WORD | ||
| DINT_TO_*** | DINT_TO_DWORD | DINT | DWORD | |
| DINT_TO_LWORD | DINT | LWORD | ||
| DINT_TO_REAL | DINT | REAL | ||
| DINT_TO_LREAL | DINT | LREAL | ||
| DINT_TO_STRING | DINT | STRING | ||
| LINT_TO_*** | LINT_TO_SINT | LINT | SINT | |
| LINT_TO_INT | LINT | INT | ||
| LINT_TO_DINT | LINT | DINT | ||
| LINT_TO_USINT | LINT | USINT | ||
| LINT_TO_UINT | LINT | UINT | ||
| LINT_TO_UDINT | LINT | UDINT | ||
| LINT_TO_ULINT | LINT | ULINT | ||
| LINT_TO_BOOL | LINT | BOOL | ||
| LINT_TO_BYTE | LINT | BYTE | ||
| LINT_TO_WORD | LINT | WORD | ||
| LINT_TO_DWORD | LINT | DWORD | ||
| LINT_TO_LWORD | LINT | LWORD | ||
| LINT_TO_REAL | LINT | REAL | ||
| LINT_TO_LREAL | LINT | LREAL | ||
| LINT_TO_STRING | LINT | STRING | ||
| USINT_TO_*** | USINT_TO_SINT | USINT | SINT | |
| USINT_TO_INT | USINT | INT | ||
| USINT_TO_DINT | USINT | DINT | ||
| USINT_TO_LINT | USINT | LINT |
App.4 - 2
Appendix 4 Insturction List
| Function Group | Function | Input data type | Output data type | Remarks |
| USINT_TO_UINT | USINT | UINT | ||
| USINT_TO_UDINT | USINT | UDINT | ||
| USINT_TO_ULINT | USINT | ULINT | ||
| USINT_TO_BOOL | USINT | BOOL | ||
| USINT_TO_BYTE | USINT | BYTE | ||
| USINT_TO_WORD | USINT | WORD | ||
| USINT_TO_DWORD | USINT | DWORD | ||
| USINT_TO_LWORD | USINT | LWORD | ||
| USINT_TO_REAL | USINT | REAL | ||
| USINT_TO_LREAL | USINT | LREAL | ||
| USINT_TO_STRING | USINT | STRING | ||
| UINT_TO_*** | UINT_TO_SINT | UINT | SINT | |
| UINT_TO_INT | UINT | INT | ||
| UINT_TO_DINT | UINT | DINT | ||
| UINT_TO_LINT | UINT | LINT | ||
| UINT_TO_USINT | UINT | USINT | ||
| UINT_TO_UDINT | UINT | UDINT | ||
| UINT_TO_ULINT | UINT | ULINT | ||
| UINT_TO_BOOL | UINT | BOOL | ||
| UINT_TO_BYTE | UINT | BYTE | ||
| UINT_TO_WORD | UINT | WORD | ||
| UINT_TO_DWORD | UINT | DWORD | ||
| UINT_TO_*** | UINT_TO_LWORD | UINT | LWORD | |
| UINT_TO_REAL | UINT | REAL | ||
| UINT_TO_STRING | UINT | STRING | ||
| UINT_TO_LREAL | UINT | LREAL | ||
| UINT_TO_DATE | UINT | DATE | ||
| UDINT_TO_*** | UDINT_TO_SINT | UDINT | SINT | |
| UDINT_TO_INT | UDINT | INT | ||
| UDINT_TO_DINT | UDINT | DINT | ||
| UDINT_TO_LINT | UDINT | LINT | ||
| UDINT_TO_USINT | UDINT | USINT | ||
| UDINT_TO_UINT | UDINT | UINT | ||
| UDINT_TO_ULINT | UDINT | ULINT | ||
| UDINT_TO_BOOL | UDINT | BOOL | ||
| UDINT_TO_BYTE | UDINT | BYTE | ||
| UDINT_TO_WORD | UDINT | WORD | ||
| UDINT_TO_DWORD | UDINT | DWORD | ||
| UDINT_TO_LWORD | UDINT | LWORD | ||
| UDINT_TO_REAL | UDINT | REAL | ||
| UDINT_TO_LREAL | UDINT | LREAL | - | |
| UDINT_TO_TOD | UDINT | TOD | - | |
| UDINT_TO_TIME | UDINT | TIME | - | |
| UDINT_TO_STRING | UDINT | STRING | - | |
| ULINT_TO_*** | ULINT_TO_SINT | ULINT | SINT | - |
| ULINT_TO_INT | ULINT | INT | - | |
| ULINT_TO_DINT | ULINT | DINT | - | |
| ULINT_TO_LINT | ULINT | LINT | - | |
| ULINT_TO_USINT | ULINT | USINT | - | |
| ULINT_TO_UINT | ULINT | UINT | - | |
| ULINT_TO_UDINT | ULINT | UDINT | - | |
| ULINT_TO_BOOL | ULINT | BOOL | - | |
| ULINT_TO_BYTE | ULINT | BYTE | - | |
| ULINT_TO_WORD | ULINT | WORD | - | |
| ULINT_TO_DWORD | ULINT | DWORD | - | |
| ULINT_TO_LWORD | ULINT | LWORD | - | |
| ULINT_TO_REAL | ULINT | REAL | - | |
| ULINT_TO_LREAL | ULINT | LREAL | - | |
| ULINT_TO_STRING | ULINT | STRING | - |
App.4 - 3
Appendix 4 Insturction List
| Function Group | Function | Input data type | Output data type | Remarks |
| BOOL_TO_*** | BOOL_TO_SINT | BOOL | SINT | - |
| BOOL_TO_INT | BOOL | INT | - | |
| BOOL_TO_DINT | BOOL | DINT | - | |
| BOOL_TO_LINT | BOOL | LINT | - | |
| BOOL_TO_USINT | BOOL | USINT | - | |
| BOOL_TO_UINT | BOOL | UINT | - | |
| BOOL_TO_UDINT | BOOL | UDINT | - | |
| BOOL_TO_ULINT | BOOL | ULINT | - | |
| BOOL_TO_BYTE | BOOL | BYTE | - | |
| BOOL_TO_*** | BOOL_TO_WORD | BOOL | WORD | - |
| BOOL_TO_DWORD | BOOL | DWORD | - | |
| BOOL_TO_LWORD | BOOL | LWORD | - | |
| BOOL_TO_STRING | BOOL | STRING | - | |
| BYTE_TO_*** | BYTE_TO_SINT | BYTE | SINT | - |
| BYTE_TO_INT | BYTE | INT | - | |
| BYTE_TO_DINT | BYTE | DINT | - | |
| BYTE_TO_LINT | BYTE | LINT | - | |
| BYTE_TO_USINT | BYTE | USINT | - | |
| BYTE_TO_UINT | BYTE | UINT | - | |
| BYTE_TO_UDINT | BYTE | UDINT | - | |
| BYTE_TO_ULINT | BYTE | ULINT | - | |
| BYTE_TO_BOOL | BYTE | BOOL | - | |
| BYTE_TO_WORD | BYTE | WORD | - | |
| BYTE_TO_DWORD | BYTE | DWORD | - | |
| BYTE_TO_LWORD | BYTE | LWORD | - | |
| BYTE_TO_STRING | BYTE | STRING | - | |
| WORD_TO_*** | WORD_TO_SINT | WORD | SINT | - |
| WORD_TO_INT | WORD | INT | - | |
| WORD_TO_DINT | WORD | DINT | - | |
| WORD_TO_LINT | WORD | LINT | - | |
| WORD_TO_USINT | WORD | USINT | - | |
| WORD_TO_UINT | WORD | UINT | - | |
| WORD_TO_UDINT | WORD | UDINT | - | |
| WORD_TO_ULINT | WORD | ULINT | ||
| WORD_TO_BOOL | WORD | BOOL | ||
| WORD_TO_BYTE | WORD | BYTE | ||
| WORD_TO_DWORD | WORD | DWORD | ||
| WORD_TO_LWORD | WORD | LWORD | ||
| WORD_TO_DATE | WORD | DATE | ||
| WORD_TO_STRING | WORD | STRING | ||
| DWORD_TO_*** | DWORD_TO_SINT | DWORD | SINT | |
| DWORD_TO_INT | DWORD | INT | ||
| DWORD_TO_DINT | DWORD | DINT | ||
| DWORD_TO_LINT | DWORD | LINT | ||
| DWORD_TO_USINT | DWORD | USINT | ||
| DWORD_TO_UINT | DWORD | UINT | ||
| DWORD_TO_UDINT | DWORD | UDINT | ||
| DWORD_TO_ULINT | DWORD | ULINT | ||
| DWORD_TO_BOOL | DWORD | BOOL | ||
| DWORD_TO_BYTE | DWORD | BYTE | ||
| DWORD_TO_WORD | DWORD | WORD | ||
| DWORD_TO_LWORD | DWORD | LWORD | ||
| DWORD_TO_REAL | DWORD | REAL | ||
| DWORD_TO_TIME | DWORD | TIME | ||
| DWORD_TO_TOD | DWORD | TOD | ||
| DWORD_TO_*** | DWORD_TO_STRING | DWORD | STRING | |
| LWORD_TO_*** | LWORD_TO_SINT | LWORD | SINT | |
| LWORD_TO_INT | LWORD | INT | ||
| LWORD_TO_DINT | LWORD | DINT |
App.4 - 4
Appendix 4 Insturction List
| Function Group | Function | Input data type | Output data type | Remarks |
| LWORD_TO_LINT | LWORD | LINT | ||
| LWORD_TO_USINT | LWORD | USINT | ||
| LWORD_TO_UINT | LWORD | UINT | ||
| LWORD_TO_UDINT | LWORD | UDINT | ||
| LWORD_TO_ULINT | LWORD | ULINT | ||
| LWORD_TO_BOOL | LWORD | BOOL | ||
| LWORD_TO_BYTE | LWORD | BYTE | ||
| LWORD_TO_WORD | LWORD | WORD | ||
| LWORD_TO_DWORD | LWORD | DWORD | ||
| LWORD_TO_LREAL | LWORD | LREAL | ||
| LWORD_TO_DT | LWORD | DT | ||
| LWORD_TO_STRING | LWORD | STRING | ||
| STRING_TO_*** | STRING _TO_SINT | STRING | SINT | |
| STRING _TO_INT | STRING | INT | ||
| STRING _TO_DINT | STRING | DINT | ||
| STRING _TO_LINT | STRING | LINT | ||
| STRING _TO_USINT | STRING | USINT | ||
| STRING _TO_UINT | STRING | UINT | ||
| STRING _TO_UDINT | STRING | UDINT | ||
| STRING _TO_ULINT | STRING | ULINT | ||
| STRING _TO_BOOL | STRING | BOOL | ||
| STRING _TO_BYTE | STRING | BYTE | ||
| STRING _TO_WORD | STRING | WORD | ||
| STRING _TO_DWORD | STRING | DWORD | ||
| STRING _TO_LWORD | STRING | LWORD | ||
| STRING _TO_REAL | STRING | REAL | ||
| STRING _TO_LREAL | STRING | LREAL | ||
| STRING _TO_DT | STRING | DT | ||
| STRING _TO_DATE | STRING | DATE | ||
| STRING _TO_TOD | STRING | TOD | ||
| STRING _TO_TIME | STRING | TIME | ||
| TIME_TO_*** | TIME_TO_UDINT | TIME | UDINT | |
| TIME_TO_DWORD | TIME | DWORD | ||
| TIME_TO_STRING | TIME | STRING | ||
| DATE_TO_*** | DATE_TO_UINT | DATE | UINT | |
| DATE_TO_WORD | DATE | WORD | ||
| DATE_TO_STRING | DATE | STRING | ||
| TOD_TO_*** | TOD_TO_UDINT | TOD | UDINT | |
| TOD_TO_DWORD | TOD | DWORD | ||
| TOD_TO_STRING | TOD | STRING | ||
| DT_TO_*** | DT_TO_LWORD | DT | LWORD | |
| DT_TO_DATE | DT | DATE | ||
| DT_TO_TOD | DT | TOD | ||
| DT_TO_STRING | DT | STRING | ||
| ***_TO_BCD | SINT_TO_BCD_BYTE | SINT | BYTE(BCD) | |
| INT_TO_BCD_WORD | INT | WORD(BCD) | ||
| DINT_TO_BCD_DWORD | DINT | DWORD(BCD) | ||
| LINT_TO_BCD_LWORD | LINT | LWORD(BCD) | ||
| USINT_TO_BCD_BYTE | USINT | BYTE(BCD) | ||
| UINT_TO_BCD_WORD | UINT | WORD(BCD) | ||
| UDINT_TO_BCD_DWORD | UDINT | DWORD(BCD) | ||
| ULINT_TO_BCD_LWORD | ULINT | LWORD(BCD) |
App.4 - 5
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4.1.2 Numerical Operation Function
(1) Numerical Operation Function with One Input
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| General Function | |||
| 1 | ABS | Absolute value operation | |
| 2 | SQRT | Square root operation | |
| Log function | |||
| 3 | LN | Natural logarithm operation | |
| 4 | LOG | Common logarithm Base to 10 operation | |
| 5 | EXP | Natural exponential operation | |
| Trigonometric function | |||
| 6 | SIN | Sine operation | |
| 7 | COS | Cosine operation | |
| 8 | TAN | Tangent operation | |
| 9 | ASIN | Arc sine operation | |
| 10 | ACOS | Arc Cosine operation | |
| 11 | ATAN | Arc Tangent operation | |
| Angle function | |||
| 12 | RAD_REAL | Convert degree into radian | |
| 13 | RAD_LREAL | ||
| 14 | DEG_REAL | Convert radian into degree | |
| 15 | DEG_LREAL |
(2) Basic Arithmetic Function
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| Operation function of which input number (n) can be extended up to 8. | |||
| 1 | ADD | Addition (OUT <= IN1 + IN2 + ... + INn) | |
| 2 | MUL | Multiplication (OUT <= IN1 * IN2 * ... * INn) | |
| Operation function of which input number is fixed. | |||
| 3 | SUB | Subtraction (OUT <= IN1 - IN2) | |
| 4 | DIV | Division (OUT <= IN1 / IN2) | |
| 5 | MOD | Calculate remainder (OUT <= IN1 Modulo IN2) | |
| 6 | EXPT | Exponential operation (OUT <= IN1IN2) | |
| 7 | MOVE | Copy data (OUT <= IN) | |
| Input data exchange | |||
| 8 | XCHG_*** | Exchanges two input data |
App.4 - 6
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4.1.3 Bit Arrary Function
(1) Bit-shift Function
(2) Bit Operation Function
Appendix 4.1.4 Selection Function
Appendix 4.1.5 Data Exchange Function
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | SWAP_BYTE | Swaps upper NIBBLE for lower NIBBLE data of BYTE. | |
| SWAP_WORD | Swaps upper BYTE for lower BYTE data of WORD. | ||
| SWAP_DWORD | Swaps upper WORD for lower WORD data DWORD. | ||
| SWAP_LWORD | Swaps upper DWORD for lower DWORD data of LWORD. | ||
| 2 | ARY_SWAP_BYTE | Swaps upper/lower NIBBLE of BYTE elements in array. | |
| ARY_SWAP_WORD | Swaps upper/lower BYTE of WORD elements in array. | ||
| ARY_SWAP_DWORD | Swaps upper/lower WORD of DWORD elements in array. | ||
| ARY_SWAP_LWORD | Swaps upper/lower DWORD of LWORD elements in array. |
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | SHL | Shift input to the left of N bit(the right is filled with 0) | |
| 2 | SHR | Shift input to the right of N bit (the left is filled with 0) | |
| 3 | SHIFT_C_*** | Shift input to the designated direction as much as N bit (carry) | |
| 4 | ROL | Rotate input to the left of N bit | |
| 5 | ROR | Rotate input to the right of N bit | |
| 6 | ROTATE_C_*** | Rotate input to the direction as much as N bit (carry) |
| No. | Function name | Description (n can be extended up to 8) | Remarks |
| 1 | AND | Logical AND (OUT <= IN1 AND IN2 AND ... AND INn) | |
| 2 | OR | Logical OR (OUT <= IN1 OR IN2 OR ... OR INn) | |
| 3 | XOR | Exclusive OR (OUT <= IN1 XOR IN2 XOR ... XOR INn) | |
| 4 | NOT | Reverse logic (OUT <= NOT IN1) | |
| 5 | XNR | Exclusive logic AND (OUT <= IN1 XNR IN2 XNR ... XNR INn) |
| No. | Function name | Description(n can be extended up to 8) | Remarks |
| 1 | SEL | Selects from two inputs (IN0 or IN1) | |
| 2 | MAX | Produces the maximum value among input IN1,...INn | |
| 3 | MIN | Produces the minimum value among input IN1,...INn | |
| 4 | LIMIT | Limits upper and lower boundaries | |
| 5 | MUX | Outputs the K-th input among input IN1,…INn |
App.4 - 7
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4.1.6 Comparison Function
| No. | Function name | Description (n can be extended up to 8) | Remarks |
| 1 | GT | ‘Greater than’ comparison OUT <= (IN1>IN2) & (IN2>IN3) & ... & (INn-1 > INn) |
|
| 2 | GE | ‘Greater than or equal to’ comparison OUT <= (IN1>=IN2) & (IN2>=IN3) & ... & (INn-1 >= INn) |
|
| 3 | EQ | ‘Equal to’ comparison OUT <= (IN1=IN2) & (IN2=IN3) & ... & (INn-1 = INn) |
|
| 4 | LE | 'Less than or equal to' comparison OUT <= (IN1<=IN2) & (IN2<=IN3) & ... & (INn-1 <= INn) |
|
| 5 | LT | ‘Less than’ comparison OUT <= (IN1<IN2) & (IN2<IN3) & ... & (INn-1 < INn) |
|
| 6 | NE | ‘Not equal to’ comparison OUT <= (IN1<>IN2) & (IN2<>IN3) & ... & (INn-1 <> INn) |
Appendix 4.1.7 Character String Function
Appendix 4.1.8 Date and Time of Day Function
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | LEN | Find a length of a character string | |
| 2 | LEFT | Take a left side of a string (size of L) and output it | |
| 3 | RIGHT | Take a right side of a string (size of L) and output it | |
| 4 | MID | Take a middle side of a string (size of L from the P-th character) |
|
| 5 | CONCAT | Concatenate the input character string in order | |
| 6 | INSERT | Insert the second string after the P-th character of the first string |
|
| 7 | DELETE | Delete a string (size of L from the P-th character) | |
| 8 | REPLACE | Replace a size of L from the P-th character of the first string by the second string |
|
| 9 | FIND | Find a starting point of the first string which has a same pattern of the second string. |
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | ADD_TIME | Add time (Time/time of day/date and time addition) | |
| 2 | SUB_TIME | Subtract time (Time/time of day/date and time subtraction) |
|
| SUB_DATE | Calculate time by subtracting date from date | ||
| SUB_TOD | Calculate time by subtracting TOD from TOD | ||
| SUB_DT | Calculate time by subtracting DT from DT | ||
| 3 | MUL_TIME | Multiply number to time | |
| 4 | DIV_TIME | Divide time by number | |
| 5 | CONCAT_TIME | Concatenate date to make TOD |
App.4 - 8
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4.1.9 System Control Function
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | DI | Invalidates interrupt (Not to permit task program starting) | |
| 2 | EI | Permits running for a task program | |
| 3 | STOP | Stop running by a task program | |
| 4 | ESTOP | Emergency running stop by a program | |
| 5 | DIREC_IN | Update input data | |
| 6 | DIREC_O | Updates output data | |
| 7 | WDT_RST | Initialize a timer of watchdog | |
| 8 | MCS | Master Control | |
| 9 | MCSCLR | Master Control Clear | |
| 10 | FALS | Self check(error display) | |
| 11 | OUTOFF | Output Off |
Appendix 4.1.10 File Function
Appendix 4.1.11 Data Manipulation Function
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | MEQ_*** | Compare whether two inputs are equal after masking | |
| 2 | DIS_*** | Data distribution | |
| 3 | UNI_*** | Unite data | |
| 4 | BIT_BYTE | Combine 8 bits into one BYTE | |
| 5 | BYTE_BIT | Divide one BYTE into 8 bits | |
| 6 | BYTE_WORD | Combine two bytes into one WORD | |
| 7 | WORD_BYTE | Divide one WORD into two bytes | |
| 8 | WORD_DWORD | Combine two WORD data into DWORD | |
| 9 | DWORD_WORD | Divide DWORD into 2 WORD data | |
| 10 | DWORD_LWORD | Combine two DWORD data into LWORD | |
| 11 | LWORD_DWORD | Divide LWORD into two DWORD data | |
| 12 | GET_CHAR | Get one character from a character string | |
| 13 | PUT_CHAR | Puts a character in a string | |
| 14 | STRING_BYTE | Convert a string into a byte array | |
| 15 | BYTE_STRING | Convert a byte array into a string |
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | RSET | Setting file register block number | |
| 2 | EBCMP | Block comparison | |
| 3 | EMOV | Reading data from the preset flash area | |
| 4 | EERRST | Flash memory related error flag clear |
App.4 - 9
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4.1.12 Stack Operation Function
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | FIFO_*** | First In First Out | |
| 2 | LIFO_*** | Last In First Out |
Appendix 4.2 MK(MASTER-K) Function
| No. | Function name | Description(n can be extended up to 8) | Remarks |
| 1 | ENCO_B,W,D,L | Output a position of On bit by number | |
| 2 | DECO_B,W,D,L | Turn a selected bit on | |
| 3 | BSUM_B,W,D,L | Output a number of On bit | |
| 4 | SEG_WORD | Convert BCD/HEX into 7-segment code | |
| 5 | BMOV_B,W,D,L | Move part of a bit string | |
| 6 | INC_B,W,D,L | Increase IN data | |
| 7 | DEC_B,W,D,L | Decrease IN data |
Appendix 4.3 Array Operation Function
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | ARY_MOVE | Copy array-typed data (OUT <= IN) | |
| 2 | ARY_CMP_*** | Array comparison | |
| 3 | ARY_SCH_*** | Array search | |
| 4 | ARY_FLL_*** | Filling an array with data | |
| 5 | ARY_AVE_*** | Find an average of an array | |
| 6 | ARY_SFT_C_*** | Array bit shift left with carry | |
| 7 | ARY_ROT_C_*** | Bit rotation of array with carry | |
| 8 | SHIFT_A_*** | Shift array elements | |
| 9 | ROTATE_A_*** | Rotates array elements |
App.4 - 10
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4.4 Basic Function Block
Appendix 4.4.1 Bistable Function Block
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | SR | Set preference bistable | |
| 2 | RS | Reset preference bistable | |
| 3 | SEMA | Semaphore |
Appendix 4.4.2 Edge Detection Function Block
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | R_TRIG | Rising edge detector | |
| 2 | F_TRIG | Falling edge detector | |
| 3 | FF | Reverse output if input condition rises |
Appendix 4.4.3 Counter
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | CTU_*** | Up Counter INT,DINT,LINT,UINT,UDINT,ULINT |
|
| 2 | CTD_*** | Down Counter INT,DINT,LINT,UINT,UDINT,ULINT |
|
| 3 | CTUD_*** | Up Down Counter INT,DINT,LINT,UINT,UDINT,ULINT |
|
| 4 | CTR | Ring Counter |
Appendix 4.4.4 Timer
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | TP | Pulse Timer | |
| 2 | TON | On-Delay Timer | |
| 3 | TOF | Off-Delay Timer | |
| 4 | TMR | Integrating Timer | |
| 5 | TP_RST | TP with reset | |
| 6 | TRTG | Retriggerable Timer | |
| 7 | TOF_RST | TOF with reset | |
| 8 | TON_UINT | TON with integer setting | |
| 9 | TOF_UINT | TOF with integer setting | |
| 10 | TP_UINT | TP with integer setting | |
| 11 | TMR_UINT | TMR with integer setting | |
| 12 | TMR_FLK | Blink timer | |
| 13 | TRTG_UINT | Integer setting retriggerable timer |
App.4 - 11
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4.4.5 File Function Block
Appendix 4.4.6 Other Function Block
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | SCON | Step Controller | |
| 2 | DUTY | Scan setting On/Off | |
| 3 | RTC_SET | Write time data |
Appendix 4.4.7 Special Function Block
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | GET | Read special module data | |
| 2 | PUT | Write special module data | |
| 3 | ARY_GET | Read special module data(array) | |
| 4 | ARY_PUT | Write special module data(array) |
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | EBREAD | Read R area data from flash area | |
| 2 | EBWRITE | Write R area data to flash area |
App.4 - 12
Appendix 4 Insturction List
Appendix 4.4.10 Positioning Function Block
| No. | Function block name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | APM_ORG | Return to original point run | |
| 2 | APM_FLT | Floating original point setting | |
| 3 | APM_DST | Direct run | |
| 4 | APM_IST | Indirect run | |
| 5 | APM_LIN | Linear interpolation run | |
| 6 | APM_SST | Simultaneous run | |
| 7 | APM_VTP | Speed/position control conversion | |
| 8 | APM_PTV | Position/speed control conversion | |
| 9 | APM_STP | Decelerating stop | |
| 10 | APM_SSP | Position synchronization | |
| 11 | APM_SSSB | Speed synchronization | |
| 12 | APM_POR | Position override | |
| 13 | APM_SOR | Speed override | |
| 14 | APM_PSO | Positioning speed override | |
| 15 | APM_INC | Inching run | |
| 16 | APM_SNS | Run step no. change | |
| 17 | APM_MOF | M code cancel | |
| 18 | APM_PRS | Present position preset | |
| 19 | APM_SIP | Input signal parameter setting | |
| 20 | APM_EMG | Emergency stop | |
| 21 | APM_RST | Error reset/output prohibition cancel | |
| 22 | APM_WRT | Saving parameter/run data |
Appendix 4.5 Expanded Function
| No. | Function name | Description | Remarks |
| 1 | FOR | Repeat a block of FOR ~ NEXT n times | |
| 2 | NEXT | ||
| 3 | BREAK | Escape a block of FOR ~ NEXT | |
| 4 | CALL | Call a SBRT routine | |
| 5 | SBRT | Assign a routine to be called by the CALL function | |
| 6 | RET | RETURN | |
| 7 | JMP | Jump to a place of LABLE | |
| 8 | INIT_DONE | Terminate an initial task | |
| 9 | END | Terminate a program |
App.4 - 13
| Warranty |
1. Warranty Period
The product you purchased will be guaranteed for 18 months from the date of manufacturing.
2. Scope of Warranty
Any trouble or defect occurring for the above-mentioned period will be partially replaced or repaired. However,
please note the following cases will be excluded from the scope of warranty.
(1) Any trouble attributable to unreasonable condition, environment or handling otherwise specified in the
manual,
(2) Any trouble attributable to others’ products,
(3) If the product is modified or repaired in any other place not designated by the company,
(4) Due to unintended purposes
(5) Owing to the reasons unexpected at the level of the contemporary science and technology when delivered.
(6) Not attributable to the company; for instance, natural disasters or fire
3. Since the above warranty is limited to PLC unit only, make sure to use the product considering the safety for
system configuration or applications.
| Environmental Policy |
LSIS Co.,Ltd. supports and observes the environmental policy as below.
LSIS considers the environmental
preservation as the preferential management
subject and every staff of LSIS use the
reasonable endeavors for the pleasurably
environmental preservation of the earth.
LSIS’ PLC unit is designed to protect the
environment. For the disposal, separate
aluminum, iron and synthetic resin (cover)
from the product as they are reusable.
Environmental Management About Disposal
10310001059
■ LS Hukai Electric(Hubei) Co., Ltd./CHINA
No. 100, Tanjiahe Road, Dianjun District, Yichang City, Hubei Province, P.R. China
Tel : 86-717-667-7536 Fax : 86-717-667-7222 E-Mail : jaewoongh@lsis.com
■ LS-VINA Industrial Systems Co., Ltd./VIETNAM
Room 1311, 13th, M3-M4 Building 91 Nguyen Chi Thanh street, Hanoi, Vietnam
Tel : 84-4-6275-8055 Fax : 86-21-5237-7189
■ LSIS(ME) FZE/U.A.E.
LOB 19-205, JAFZA View Tower, Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Tel : 971-4-886-5360 Fax : 971-4-886-5361 E-Mail : shunlee@lsis.com
■ LSIS Europe B.V./NETHERLANDS
1st. Floor, Tupolevlaan 48, 1119NZ,Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands
Tel : 31-20-654-1420 Fax : 31-20-654-1429 E-Mail : htha@lsis.com
■ LSIS Japan Co., Ltd./JAPAN
16th, Higashi-Kan, Akasaka Twin Tower, 2-17-22, Akasaka, Minato-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Tel : 81-3-3582-9128 Fax : 81-3-3582-2667 E-Mail : jschuna@lsis.com
■ LSIS USA Inc./U.S.A
2000 Millbrook Drive, Lincolnshire, Chicago, IL 60069, United States of America
Tel : 847-941-8240 Fax : 847-941-8259 E-Mail : ybleeb@lsis.com
■ LSIS Gurgaon Office/INDIA
109 First Floor, Park Central, Sector-30, Gurgaon- 122 002, Haryana, India
Tel : +0091-124-493-0070 Fax : 91-1244-930-066 E-Mail : hwyim@lsis.com
■ HEAD OFFICE
LS Tower, 127, LS-ro, Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-Do, 431-848, Korea
Tel : (82-2)2034-4870/Fax : 82-2-2034-4648 E-mail : cshwang@lsis.biz
-Southeast Asia +82-2-2034-4888 cshwang@lsis.com (Charles Hwang)
-Europe +82-2-2034-4676 sukyong@lsis.com (Brian Choi)
-Turkey/Israel/CIS +82-2-2034-4879 dkimc@lsis.com (Daniel Kim)
-Oceania +82-2-2034-4394 kacho@lsis.com (Kendra Cho)
-North/Latin America +82-2-2034-4286 hkchung@lsis.com (Hank Raul Chung)
-Southwest Asia/Africa +82-2-2034-4467 myleed@lsis.com (Henry Lee)
-Middle East +971-4-886-5360 khchoi1@lsis.com (Lambert Choi)
■ LSIS(Shanghai) Co., Ltd. /CHINA
32nd Room 1~4, 32/F, Great Wall Building, No.3000 North Zhongshan Road,
Putuo District, Shanghai, P.R. China
Tel : 86-21-5237-9977(609) Fax : 86-21-5237-7189
■ LSIS(Dalian) Co., Ltd. /CHINA
No. 15, Liaohexi 3-Road, Economic and Technical Development zone, Dalian, P.R.
China
Tel : 86-411-8731-7542 Fax : 86-411-8730-7560 E-Mail : dskim@lsis.com
■ LSIS(Wuxi) Co., Ltd./CHINA
102-A, National High & New Tech Industrial Development Area, Wuxi, Jiangsu, P.R.
China
Tel : 86-510-8534-6666 Fax : 86-510-8534-4078 E-Mail : sojin@lsis.com
※ LSIS constantly endeavors to improve its product so that
information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
ⓒ LSIS Co., Ltd. 2010 All Rights Reserved.
2015. 2